0% found this document useful (0 votes)

629 views

APTARE StorageConsole UserGuide

APTARE(r) and StorageConsole(r) are registered trademarks of APTARE, Inc. And / or its affiliates in the u.s. And certain other countries. The following table records all revisions to this publication. Each entry indicates the date of the release and the number of the system release.

Uploaded by

Balasubramani Ramamurthy

Available Formats

Download as PDF, TXT or read online on Scribd

0% found this document useful (0 votes)

629 views

APTARE StorageConsole UserGuide

Uploaded by

Balasubramani Ramamurthy

Available Formats

Download as PDF, TXT or read online on Scribd

You are on page 1/ 382

APTARE StorageConsole Report Users Guide 7.

Copyrights and Trademarks

Copyright 2007-2009 APTARE, Inc., All rights reserved. The information contained in this book is subject to change without notice. Reproduction, adaptation or translation without prior written permission is prohibited, except as allowed under the copyright laws. APTARE and StorageConsole are registered trademarks of APTARE, Inc. and/or its affiliates in the U.S. and certain other countries. Hitachi is a trademark of Hitachi Data Systems. Acrobat and the Acrobat logo are trademarks of Adobe Systems Incorporated. Microsoft, Microsoft Windows and Microsoft Internet Explorer are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and/or other countries. Macintosh, Mac, Apple, Safari, and Mac OS are trademarks of Apple Computer, Inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries. EMC Legato NetWorker is a registered trademark of EMC Corporation. NetBackup and Backup Exec are registered trademarks of Symantec Corporation. NetApp, Data ONTAP, SnapVault, SnapMirror, and FlexVol are registered trademarks of NetApp, Inc. VMware is a registered trademark of VMware, Inc. Other company and product names mentioned herein can be trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective companies and should be treated as such.

Publication Change Record

The following table records all revisions to this publication. This first entry is always the publications initial release. Each entry indicates the date of the release and the number of the system release to which the revision corresponds.
Doc Revision ID MK-97APT025-01 Date February 2008 March 2008 April 2008 May 2008 June 2008 July 2008 September 2008 December 2008 April 2009 System Release APTARE StorageConsole, v6.5 APTARE StorageConsole, v6.5.19 APTARE StorageConsole, v6.5.22, v6.5.23, v6.5.24 and v6.5.25

APTARE StorageConsole, v6.6 APTARE StorageConsole, v6.6 Service Pack 1 APTARE StorageConsole, v7.0

Copyrights and Trademarks

APTARE StorageConsole Report Users Guide

Contents
Preface
About This Book . . . . . . Who Should Use This Book Related Documentation . . Typographical Conventions Contacting APTARE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

i
. i . i . i . iii .iv

Chapter 1 Getting Acquainted With Reports

About the Portal User Interface . . . . Navigation Pane (Report Navigator) Content Pane . . . . . . . . . . . . Toolbar Options . . . . . . . . . . . Available Reports . . . . . . . . . . . Tables and Charts. . . . . . . . . . Logging In/Off the Portal . . . . . . . . Managing My Profile . . . . . . . . . . Changing Your Login Password . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1
.1 .1 .2 .3 .4 .4 .5 .6 .7

Chapter 2 Generating and Maintaining Reports

About the Report Designer . . . . . . . . . . . Menu Group. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Report Template and Report Instance . . . Units of Measure in Reports . . . . . . . . About Report Scope . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Selecting Report Scope . . . . . . . . . . . . Listing Server Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . Searching for Servers . . . . . . . . . . . . . Searching for Servers in Report Designers . Report Designer Parameters. . . . . . . . . . Backup Manager Primary Settings . . . . . Backup Manager Advanced Settings . . . . Capacity Manager Primary Settings . . . . Capacity Manager Advanced Settings . . . Generating Reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Advanced Filtering for Tabular Reports . . . . Filter Report Rows . . . . . . . . . . . . . Filter Report Columns. . . . . . . . . . . . Sorting Columns in Reports . . . . . . . . . . Setting Refresh Intervals . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying Reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Saving Reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Deleting Reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Searching for a Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

9
10 14 14 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 20 22 24 25 26 27 27 29 29 29 30 31 32 32

Chapter 3 Distributing, Sharing, Scheduling, Alerting

Exporting Reports . . . . . . . . . Scheduling Exported Reports . . Emailing Reports . . . . . . . . . . Scheduling Emailed Reports . . Scheduled Reports Administration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

33
34 35 38 39 42

Contents

Deleting Scheduled Reports . . . . . . . . . . . . Alerting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Configuring an Alert for a Tabular Report Instance . Sharing Reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Technical Community Sharing . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Notes to Backup Job Details . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . .

43 44 44 46 46 46

Chapter 4 Organizing Reports

Task Overview: Organizing Reports. . . . Creating Dashboards . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Reports to Dashboards . . . . . . Dashboard Example . . . . . . . . . . Deleting Reports from Dashboards . . . . Adding Reports to a Custom Menu Group . Creating a Custom Menu Group . . . . . . Changing Your Home Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

49
49 50 51 51 52 53 53 54

Chapter 5 Custom Reports

About Custom Reports . . . . . . . . . . . . Using Report Template Designer . . . . . . Creating a Custom Report Template . . . . . Configure Report Designer Components . Specify the SQL Query . . . . . . . . . . Sample Queries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Using Functions in Queries . . . . . . . . Format the Output . . . . . . . . . . . . Edit a Custom Report Template. . . . . . Exporting/Importing Report Templates . . . . Export a Report Template . . . . . . . . . Import a Report Template . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

55
55 56 59 59 64 65 72 78 85 87 87 87

Chapter 6 System Administration Reports

Collector Message Summary . . . Collection Message Summary . Data Collection Message Detail. Database Error Summary . . . . . Report Activity Summary . . . . . . Report Activity Detail . . . . . . . . Monitoring Data Collection Status . Top Running Reports. . . . . . . . Top Running Report Details. . . Version History . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

89
90 91 92 93 94 94 95 96 96 98

Chapter 7 Backup Manager Management Reports

Using Backup Manager Reports for Analysis Job Status Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . Job Summary Report . . . . . . . . . . . . Job Details Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding a Note to a Job . . . . . . . . . . Job Volume Summary Report . . . . . . . . Job Duration Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . Error Log Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . Consecutive Errors By Client . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

99
100 101 103 105 108 109 .110 .112 .114

APTARE StorageConsole Report Users Guide

Largest Backup Volume . . . . . . . Monthly Backup Summary . . . . . . Job Summary By Server . . . . . . . Running and Queued Job Summary . HPD Session Summary . . . . . . .

. . . . .

.116 .117 .118 .119 120

Chapter 8 Backup Administration Reports

Operations Dashboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Command Center Dashboard . . . . . . . . . . . Data Protection Dashboard . . . . . . . . . . . . Message of the Day Report . . . . . . . . . . . . Server Details Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Server Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Mission Control Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tailoring the Report Output by Backup Product Client Protection Summary. . . . . . . . . . . . . TSM Storage Pools Dashboard . . . . . . . . . . TSM Process Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Client Job Histogram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Job Throughput Histogram . . . . . . . . . . . Job Activity Histogram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

121
122 124 126 127 128 131 132 134 135 138 140 141 141 142

Chapter 9 Media Management Reports

Using Media Management Reports Current Media Summary . . . . . . Tape Media Summary Report . . . Tape Media Detail Report . . . . . Tape Details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

143
143 144 145 146 147

Chapter 10 Backup SLA Reports

Available SLA Reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Backup Start Time SLA Report. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Determining and Improving Backup Start Time Performance Backup Status SLA Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Changing the Success Percentage . . . . . . . . . . . . Determining and Improving Backup Success Performance . Backup Duration SLA Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Determining and Improving Backup Duration Performance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

149
150 151 152 153 153 154 155 156

Chapter 11 Backup Storage Utilization Reports

Using Storage Utilization Reports . . . . . . Disk Usage and Performance Report . . . . Tape Library and Drive Utilization Report . . Storage Unit Detail Report . . . . . . . . . . Storage Unit Event Details . . . . . . . . . . Drive Utilization and Performance Report . . Drive Performance Summary Report . . . . NetBackup Drive Performance Summary. Drive Performance Detail . . . . . . . . . . TSM Database Utilization . . . . . . . . . . Storage Unit Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . Real Time Library and Drive Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

157
158 159 161 162 164 165 167 169 170 171 172 173

Contents

Chapter 12 Backup Manager Forecasting Reports

Forecasting Overview . . . . . . . . . Media Forecasting Dashboard . . . . . Media Availability Forecast. . . . . . . Media Consumption Forecast . . . . . Media Usage Details . . . . . . . . . . Tape Drive Usage and Forecast Report Scratch Pool Forecast Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

175
175 176 179 180 181 182 183

Chapter 13 Backup Billing and Usage Reports

Available Billing and Usage Reports . . . Creating a Billing and Chargeback Policy Determining Media Chargebacks . . . . Determining Backup Chargebacks . . . . Billing and Chargeback Summary . . . . Server Consumption Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

185
185 186 187 188 189 191

Chapter 14 Backup Policies Reports

NetBackup Policy . . . . . . . Backup Policy Details . . . . TSM Policy Domains . . . . . . Policy Domain Details. . . . NetWorker Groups . . . . . . . Group Detail. . . . . . . . . Client Instance Detail . . . . Backup Specification Summary Backup Specification Detail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

193
193 194 196 197 198 199 201 202 203

Chapter 15 Restoring Files and Folders Chapter 16 Capacity Manager Reports

Overview of the Enterprise Storage Provisioning Process . . Overview of Capacity Manager Reports . . . . . . . . . . . Why Capacity Manager? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Capacity Manager Reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Capacity Manager Quick-Start List . . . . . . . . . . . . Array Capacity and Utilization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . List Array Groups. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Host Capacity & Utilization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Host Utilization Detail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LUN Utilization Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Array Group Details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . EMC CLARiiON Storage Array Group Specifics . . . . . Array Port Utilization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Array Capacity Forecast . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Host Capacity Forecast . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Applications At Risk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Over-Provisioned Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Application Storage Dashboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Application Sub-Level of the Application Storage Dashboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

205

Restoring Backup Files and Folders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205 Monitoring Progress of Restore . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206

207
208 209 209 209 213 214 218 219 221 225 229 229 230 232 233 235 236 237 239

APTARE StorageConsole Report Users Guide

Available/Reclaimable Storage. . . . . Array Utilization Summary . . . . . Allocated but Unused LUNs . . . . Allocated but Undiscovered LUNs . Unallocated LUNs. . . . . . . . . . Suspected De-provisioned Hosts . . Unused Partitions/Logical Volumes . Unused Disks/Volume Groups . . . Capacity Chargeback and Billing. . . . Utilization By Host . . . . . . . . . Utilization By Storage Tier . . . . . Utilization By Server Groups . . . . LUNs At Risk . . . . . . . . . . . . . Over-Provisioned LUNs . . . . . . . . Hosts at Risk . . . . . . . . . . . . . Over-Provisioned Hosts . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

240 240 241 242 243 244 245 246 247 248 250 251 252 254 256 258

Chapter 17 NetApp Capacity Reports

Array Capacity and Utilization (NetApp View) NetApp Storage System Detail . . . . . . . . NetApp LUN Utilization Summary . . . . . . NetApp Aggregate Summary . . . . . . . . NetApp Aggregate Detail. . . . . . . . . . . NetApp Plex Details . . . . . . . . . . . . . NetApp Volume Summary . . . . . . . . . . NetApp Volume Details. . . . . . . . . . . . NetApp NFS Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . NetApp CIFS Summary . . . . . . . . . . . QTree Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . NetApp Snapshot Summary . . . . . . . . . Array iSCSI Port Utilization . . . . . . . . . NetApp Disk Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . NetApp Aggregates at Risk . . . . . . . . . NetApp Volumes at Risk . . . . . . . . . . . Thin Provisioning Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

259
260 264 266 268 269 270 272 274 277 278 279 280 281 282 283 284 285

Chapter 18 IBM Arrays - Capacity Reports

Overview of IBM Array Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . Array Capacity & Utilization (IBM Enterprise Array View) IBM Array Site Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . IBM Array Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . IBM Array Detail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . IBM Rank Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . IBM Extent Pool Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . IBM Disk Summary. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

287
288 289 290 292 294 299 301 303

Chapter 19 HDS Dynamic Provisioning Reports

305

Hitachi Dynamic Provisioning Pool Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306 Hitachi Disk Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307 Array Capacity & Utilization (HDP View) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308

Chapter 20 Virtualization Manager Reports

309

Virtualization Terminology . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310

Contents

Overview of Virtualization Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . Understanding the Datastore . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Using Virtualization Manager for Planning and Monitoring VM Server Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . VM Server Detail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . VM Summary. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . VM Detail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . VM Files Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Performance Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Datastore Utilization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Datastore Detail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Datastore Usage Breakdown. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Physical Disk Utilization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Physical Disk Detail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Logical Disk Utilization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . VM Size Forecast . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Datastore Capacity Forecast . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

312 312 313 314 316 321 323 327 329 330 332 336 337 339 341 342 343

Chapter 21 Replication Manager Reports

Overview of Replication Manager . . SnapMirror Summary . . . . . . . . SnapMirror Details . . . . . . . . . . SnapMirror Schedule. . . . . . . . . SnapMirror Status Summary . . . . . SnapMirror Data Transfer . . . . . . SnapMirror Volume/QTrees At Risk . SnapMirror Relationship Summary . Data Protection Dashboard . . . . . FlexClone Summary . . . . . . . . . Aggregate Mirror Summary . . . . . SnapVault Secondary Configuration . SnapVault Summary . . . . . . . . . SnapVault Detail . . . . . . . . . . . SnapVault Schedule . . . . . . . . . SnapVault Status . . . . . . . . . . . SnapVault Data Transfer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

345
346 347 349 351 352 353 354 355 357 358 359 360 361 362 364 365 366

Index

367

APTARE StorageConsole Report Users Guide

Chapter0

Preface

Thank you for purchasing APTARE StorageConsole.

About This Book

This book describes how to generate, distribute, organize, and share reports. This book assumes that you read the APTARE StorageConsole Getting Started Guide for Report Users.

Who Should Use This Book

APTARE recognizes that the Portal is useful to a number of different users:
Storage Administrators Storage Managers/Directors Legal Compliance Professionals Capacity Planners Billing and Chargeback Professionals

Related Documentation
APTARE StorageConsole Release Notes, v6.5

The following documents contain additional information relevant to installing, maintaining, and administering this system.
APTARE StorageConsole Release Notes - This document outlines whats new in the release and what known issues were fixed in the release. and is available online at www.aptare.com APTARE StorageConsole Certified Configurations Guide - This document provides a list of the supported products and hardware requirements. This book is available online at www.aptare.com and on the APTARE StorageConsole Portal Software CD. APTARE StorageConsole Getting Started Guide for Report Users - This book provides a basic introduction to the Portal and describes the basic workflow to begin using the reports. This book is available online at www.aptare.com and on the APTARE StorageConsole Portal Software CD. Also, all the topics in this guide are available in the online help. APTARE StorageConsole Getting Started Guide for Administrators - This book describes the basic workflow involved in setting up the backup reporting environment. This book is available online at www.aptare.com and on the APTARE StorageConsole Portal Software CD. Also, all the topics in this guide are available in the online help. APTARE StorageConsole Data Collector Installation Guide for Symantec Backup Exec This book provides step-by-step instructions about how to install and configure the Data

About This Book

Collector. Available online at www.aptare.com and on the APTARE StorageConsole Portal Software CD. APTARE StorageConsole Data Collector Installation Guide for HP Data Protector - This book provides step-by-step instructions about how to install and configure the Data Collector. Available online at www.aptare.com and on the APTARE StorageConsole Portal Software CD. APTARE StorageConsole Data Collector Installation Guide for EMC Legato NetWorker This book provides step-by-step instructions about how to install and configure the Data Collector. Available online at www.aptare.com and on the APTARE StorageConsole Portal Software CD. APTARE StorageConsole Agent Installation Guide for NetBackup - This book provides step-by-step instructions about how to install and configure the Data Collector. Available online at www.aptare.com and on the APTARE StorageConsole Portal Software CD. APTARE StorageConsole Data Collector Installation Guide for IBM Tivoli Storage Manager - This book provides step-by-step instructions about how to install and configure the Data Collector. Available online at www.aptare.com and on the APTARE StorageConsole Portal Software CD. APTARE StorageConsole Data Collector Installation Guide for Capacity Manager - This book provides step-by-step instructions about how to install and configure the Data Collector. Available online at www.aptare.com and on the APTARE StorageConsole Portal Software CD. APTARE StorageConsole Upgrade Guide - This book provides step-by-step instructions about how to upgrade to a major release of the software. Available online at www.aptare.com and on the APTARE StorageConsole Portal Software CD. Hitachi Storage Viewer Portal Installation Guide - This book provides step-by-step instructions about how to install the Portal Server and the Reporting Database. This book is available online at www.aptare.com and on the APTARE StorageConsole Portal Software CD. APTARE StorageConsole Report Users Guide - This book describes how to generate, distribute, organize, and share reports. This book is available online at www.aptare.com and on the APTARE StorageConsole Portal Software CD. Also, all the topics in this guide are available in the online help. APTARE StorageConsole Application Administrators Guide - This book provides information about how to manage the Portal to support report generation and report access. These tasks are usually performed through the Portal user interface. This book is available online at www.aptare.com and on the APTARE StorageConsole Portal Software CD. Also, all the topics in this guide are available in the online help. APTARE StorageConsole System Administrators Guide - This book provides information to help you maintain and monitor the entire platform to ensure its availability. This book covers mostly back-end administrationadministration tasks usually performed on the Portal Server and Database Server. This book is available online at www.aptare.com and on the APTARE StorageConsole Portal Software CD. APTARE StorageConsole Database Programmers Guide - This book provides information about how to query the Reporting Database using the provided database views. This book is available online at www.aptare.com and on the APTARE StorageConsole Portal Software CD.

Administrators Guide

Typographical Conventions
This document uses different typefaces to indicate different kinds of information. The following table explains these typographical conventions.
Font
Typewriter

Bold

Italics

Meaning Indicates error messages, file name, or screen output. In a command line, indicates information to be entered exactly as shown. Indicates a variable for which you should substitute an appropriate value.

Typographical Conventions

iii

Contacting APTARE

Technical Support: Customer Care Group

[email protected] or 1-408-871-9848 1-866-9-APTARE, Option #1, 6:30am - 5:30pm Pacific Time

Sales:
[email protected] or 1 866-9-APTARE, Option #2

Administrators Guide

APTARE StorageConsole Release Notes, v6.5

Chapter0

Getting Acquainted With Reports

This chapter covers the following topics: About the Portal User Interface Available Reports Logging In/Off the Portal Managing My Profile Changing Your Login Password

About the Portal User Interface

The reporting database is accessed via a centralized web portal interface, which follows web-based standards to offer common navigation features. Using your favorite browser, you can securely view backup reporting and management details. Interactive dashboards offer drill-down access to file-level specifics.

Navigation Pane (Report Navigator)

The Navigation pane, at the left of the Portal window, provides access to dashboards and reports. Categories in this list can be expanded to reveal additional reports and then collapsed to reduce screen clutter. Click on the arrow point to the left of the entries to expand/collapse the list. .

The Report Finder search box offers an additional method for selecting a specific report or for displaying a list of similar reports. The Finder supports a word or partial word search. For example, to view a list of all of your log reports, type log in the

About the Portal User Interface

Report Finder search box. Likewise, to list reports related to SLAs, type SLA in the Report Finder box
Tip: To refresh the Navigation pane, go to the Report Finder box and click Clear.

Content Pane
The Content pane is the main display area to the right of the Navigation pane. The Content pane shows the details of elements that you select in the Navigation pane. When you select multiple reports or views from the Navigation pane, the Content pane launches tabbed displays to enable easy, concurrent access to several reports. Use typical browser actions to remove a tabbed display or to switch between tabbed views.

APTARE StorageConsole Report Users Guide

Toolbar Options
Along the top border of the Portal window, a toolbar categorizes your options.

: The items that you see depend on your permissionsUser or Administrator privileges, as shown in Table 1.1. For details about these features, see:
APTARE StorageConsole Application Administrators Guide APTARE StorageConsole Report Users Guide
Tool Item Close All Tabs New Dashboard Import Template Template Designer My Scheduled Reports My Shared Reports Go To My Homepage Set This Report As My Homepage Search Create Restore Job Manage Restore Jobs User Admin Documented in: x x self-explanatory x x Report Users Guide x x Report Users Guide x x Report Users Guide x x Report Users Guide x x Report Users Guide x x Report Users Guide x x Report Users Guide x x Report Users Guide x x Report Users Guide x Application Administrators Guide x Application Administrators Guide x x Report Users Guide x x Report Users Guide x Application Administrators Guide x Application Administrators Guide x Application Administrators Guide x Application Administrators Guide x Application Administrators Guide x Application Administrators Guide x Application Administrators Guide x x Report Users Guide x x self-explanatory x x self-explanatory x x Report Users Guide

Report

Tools

Data Collection Status My Profile Change My Password Server Groups Attributes Users and Privileges User Groups

Admin Domains Discovery Policies Date Collector Policies Billing and Usage Policies Help Topics About APTARE StorageConsole End your session.
Portal Toolbar Options

Help Logout
Table 1.1

About the Portal User Interface

Available Reports
The Portal includes a number of pre-defined reports, which you can tailor and save as report instances to meet your specific reporting requirements. The best way to become acquainted with available reports is to expand the list in the Navigation pane, to the left of the Portals browser window. Reports are designed to enable views of high-level information, with drilldown access to details in sub-reports. This hierarchy is simply organized as:
Tier 1 - High-level reports present data in the form of tables and charts. Tier 2 - Summary level data is presented in tabular form. The rows in the table are the details that were aggregated in the high-level chart. Tier 3 - Detail reports display specifics related to the drilldown selection in a Tier 2 report.

Tables and Charts

Tables display data in rows and columns, with highlighted links that enable drilldown access to additional details. When you click a link, a new report is generated in a new pane with a tab displayed at the top of the Content pane. Tabular data can be sorted in ascending or descending order by clicking the column headers. Some tables use color to highlight potential problems. For example, the Host Utilization Detail report highlights values when they fall below the availability threshold. Charts utilize colored bar graphs and pie charts to enable at-a-glance analysis. Multi-colored bars can be deciphered with a few simple moves of your mouse. Glide your cursor over each colored section of a bar or pie to view a text description of what that portion of the bar/pie represents. For example, in the Job Status Summary report, a single bar will reflect the number of event failures, the number of warnings, and the number of successful backups. In addition, some charts display a trend line graph with data points represented as percentages. If you move your cursor over a particular data point arrow, the performance percentage value will be displayed.

APTARE StorageConsole Report Users Guide

Logging In/Off the Portal

The Portal allows more than one Administrator and User to be logged on simultaneously. The Portal works with the following browsers:
Browser Microsoft Internet Explorer 7.0+ Mac Windows Unix x Linux

Mozilla Firefox 2.0+, 3.0+ Apple Safari 3.2+

Table 1.2 Supported Browsers

x x

To log in to the Portal:

1. Do one of the following from your browser: If your company hosts the Portal, go to http://aptareportal.mydomain.com. If a third-party hosts your Portal, go to http://my.storageconsole.com. The Portal login window appears. 2. Type your email address and password, then click the Login button. If this is your first time logging in to the Portal, your Administrator provided you a default password.

To log off the Portal: Click on Logout in the upper right-hand corner of the Portal toolbar. The login page and a message appears, confirming that youve successfully logged off the Portal.

Logging In/Off the Portal

Managing My Profile
While the Application Administrator has the responsibility of setting up login access, you can update certain other fields in your profile.

To update your profile: 1. From the Portal toolbar, select Tools > My Profile.
2. Modify any of the following fields: First name Last name Email Work phone Cell phone

Note: Your login ID can be updated only by the Application Administrator. To change your password, see Changing Your Login Password.

APTARE StorageConsole Report Users Guide

Changing Your Login Password

If you forget your password, contact your Application Administrator. Your administrator has the permissions to change any users password. Also, follow this procedure to simply change your password. The password must be a minimum of 7 characters and contain at least 1 non-alpha character. It is recommended that you create a strong password. To assign or change a user password:
1. In the Portals toolbar, choose Tools > Change Password. 2. In the User Password pane, type the new user password, confirm the password, then click Save to update the password.

Changing Your Login Password

APTARE StorageConsole Report Users Guide

APTARE StorageConsole [=qqqe4r5t6y7u78i90op--[=\\ \\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\]]]]]]]]]]] Release Notes, v6.5

Chapter1

Generating and Maintaining Reports

This chapter covers the following topics: About the Report Designer About Report Scope Selecting Report Scope Listing Server Groups Searching for Servers Report Designer Parameters Generating Reports Advanced Filtering for Tabular Reports Sorting Columns in Reports Setting Refresh Intervals Modifying Reports Saving Reports Deleting Reports Searching for a Report

About the Report Designer

The Report Designer tool enables you to specify parameters and then generate a report. To launch the Report Designer, find a report in the navigation pane at the left of the Portal window and then expand a menu group and click on any report template, as shown in the following figure. The Portal organizes reports into functional groups: Backup Manager, Capacity Manager, Virtualization Manager, and Replication Manager. These groups are represented by colored bars in the navigation pane. Click on the colored bar to expand the tree to view the available menu groups, report templates, and report instances.

To understand Report Designer, you need only understand a few basic report components, described in the following sections:
Menu Group Report Template and Report Instance

Report Designer displays a pop-up window in which you can specify report criteria, as shown in the following example. See About Report Scope for details.

APTARE StorageConsole Report Users Guide

Backup Manager Scope Selection

For Backup Manager reports, use the following procedure to modify the scope: In the Report Designer window, click Modify to launch the Client Selection window.

About the Report Designer

Capacity Manager Scope Selection

For Capacity Manager reports, use the following procedure to modify the scope: In the Report Designer window, click Modify to launch the Client Selection window.

APTARE StorageConsole Report Users Guide

Virtualization Manager Scope Selection

The Virtualization Manager reports enable a variety of mutually exclusive scope selections:
Datastores - Select specific VM storage locations for a report. Hypervisors - Expand the list to select entities within the virtualized platform, such as Data Centers and VMs. Server Groups

About the Report Designer

Menu Group
A menu group is a folder that contains all of your report templates. There are several default menu groups, including Management Reports and SLA Reports. You cannot delete these default menu groups.

Report Template and Report Instance

A report template provides a structure for generating a report based on parameters that you specify. The Portal provides many default report templates, such as Job Status Report and Job Duration report. You cannot change, rename, or delete any default report templates. However, you can create new report templates and you can generate reports from existing report templates. The reports that you generate from a report template are called report instances. You can create as many report instances as you want. A report instance is a point in time view of the current state of your data. Each time you launch a report instance, the most current information populates your browser window. You can save a report instance, which saves the scope and parameters that you specifiednot the report output.

Units of Measure in Reports

For certain reports, an Advanced option in the Report Designer enables the selection of the unit of measureMBytes, GBytes, or TBytes. If you notice a discrepancy in the values reported by the Portal reports versus the values you see in the backup product itself, this is likely due to the conversion of the units of measure. Note that the Portal uses 1024 for the value of a KB. So, at first glance when comparing reports, the following may appear to be inaccurate: 84,977,912.22 MB > converted to GB > 82,986.24 GB 84,977,912.22/1024 = 89,986.24

APTARE StorageConsole Report Users Guide

About Report Scope

When you generate a report, Report Designer prompts you to define the servers or a list of clients that you want included in the report scope. Report scope simply refers to the criteria that you specify to filter the data thats included in a report.You can scope by the following filters:
Server Groups. Refers to the server group(s) and server sub-group(s) that you can choose, which depends on the home group to which you belong. Attributes. Refers to the attributes associated with a server group; for example, operating system. For more information, go to the APTARE StorageConsole Application Administrators Guide. Clients. Select specific clients for a static report. A static report does not take into account changes in your network topology, so if you add clients to a network, you either have to explicitly include them in your report scope or add them to a server group. To ensure that clients are always included in reports, assign them to a server group.

When you generate a report, the Report Designer initiates a database query, based on the report scope that you specify. Since the nature of your IT environment is dynamic that is, its not uncommon to add server groups and clients to your networkreports reflect the updates. Use the following guidelines to ensure that your reports include the data you expect to see:
If you add new server groups after you generate a report, the next time you generate this same report, it will include different results. When you scope by server group or attributes, the Report Designer produces a dynamic report. If you add clients to your network, but do not assign them to a server group, then generate a report without including the new clients in your scope, you can be certain that the data for that client will not be in the report. This type of report scope produces a static report. However, if you add the client to a server group and this server group is part of the report scope, the report automatically includes report data for that client.

About Report Scope

Selecting Report Scope

You can create static reports or dynamic reports. To create static reports, define your report scope based on a list of individual clients. To produce dynamic reports, define your report scope based on domain, server groups, and attributes. To learn about how report scope selects clients. Go to About Report Scope. For advanced report filtering, see Advanced Filtering for Tabular Reports. To select report scope:
1. In the Navigation pane, select a report to generate. For example: Backup Manager > Management Reports > Job Status Summary The Report Designer window pops up. 2. From the Report Designer, go to the Scope pane and click Modify. The Client Selection window launches.

3. Do one of the following: Create a dynamic report. In the Server Groups tab, select the group of clients that you want to include in your report: Search for specific servers. See Searching for Servers in Report Designers. If you want to begin by including all clients, select the entire domainthe top level server group. Proceed to Step 4. If you want to begin by including specific clients within a server group, select the check box for that server group. Proceed to Step 4.

APTARE StorageConsole Report Users Guide

Create a static report. Select a list of individual clients that you want to include in your report: In the Server Groups tab, drill down to each clients server group and select the clients check box; or Go to the Clients tab and create a list of clients based on attributes. 4. To narrow your scope and filter the results based on attributes, select the attributes from the Attributes tab.
Next Step

5. Click OK. Youve specified the report scope. If necessary, continue specifying other report parameters, then click Generate to view the report that you designed.

Listing Server Groups

Typically, you generate reports for a specific server group or set of server groups. In addition, you may want to drilldown to a particular client within a server group. So, when you are defining the scope of a report, you need to understand the organization of the server groups in your domain. To search for a specific server, refer to Searching for Servers. To view the server groups in your Portal domain, use the following procedure.
1. In the Menu list at the left of the Portal window, expand Server Groups.

2. You can drill down to details for the following information: Client - displays the Server Details report Server - displays the Server Details report Last Backup - displays the Job Details Backups This Month - displays the Job Summary report

Note: The Backups this month value does not include failed jobs.

Listing Server Groups

Searching for Servers

When you are selecting a scope in a Report Designer window, you may need to find and verify details about a particular server. To generate a list of servers, from the Portal toolbar, select: Tools > Search

Searching Considerations
Wildcard searches are supported, such as: a*. The asterisk is required for wildcard searches. Search results may include servers that appear to be unrelated to the search, as host aliases also are included in the resulting server list. Click on the server to view the Server Details Report, which lists Host Aliases.

APTARE StorageConsole Report Users Guide

Searching for Servers in Report Designers

For reports that can be filtered by servers and server groups, the report designer offers a search capability, as shown in the following example.

Searching for Servers

Report Designer Parameters

Each time you generate a report, the Report Designer presents you with report parameters that you select to tailor the output. For parameter details, see:
Backup Manager Primary Settings Backup Manager Advanced Settings Capacity Manager Primary Settings Capacity Manager Advanced Settings

Note: Not all reports use all parameters. For example, the Tape Drive Usage and Forecast Report does not need to take into account specific backup events or status, so those options will not be displayed in the Report Designer window.

Backup Manager Primary Settings

The availability of selections, options, and default values varies from report to report because not all selections and options apply to all reports.

Time Period Start Date / End Date Scope Group By Media Location Media Status

Event Type Event Status # of Consecutive Errors Dynamic Report Start & End Times Cascade into sub-groups

Time Period

The reporting time periods for this report. Your choices range from the last 12 hours to the last 7 years. The options for this parameter depend on the report.
If you want a static report, specify start and end date in the date format: MM/DD/YYYY. If you want a dynamic reportthat is, a report that changes as the underlying data changesdo not specify a start and end date, as the default always represents the current day.

Start Date / End Date

Table 2.1

Backup Manager Primary Settings

APTARE StorageConsole Report Users Guide

Use this filter to specify what data will be included in a report.

By Server Group. Includes data from default and user-defined server groups. For information about server groups, see the Application Administrators Guide. By Attribute. Includes data from default and user-defined attributes or characteristics. For information about attributes, go to the APTARE StorageConsole System Administrators Guide. By Clients. Includes data for only specific clients rather than data for server groups.

Scope

To learn more about the report scope, go to About Report Scope.

The type of jobs you are interested in: All Backup & Restore Events All Backup Events Full Backups Incremental Backups Restores Use the drop-down list to specify how you want the data in the bar charts or tables to be grouped. The available options are dependent on the type of report. Some reports group by time, while others group data by either server, client, or policy. Use the drop-down list to select the type of media that you want to include in the report. The Default setting for this parameter is All Media. The Media Status parameter is included in the Tape Media Summary Report Designer. You can specify which media should be included in the report by selecting one of the following options: All Media, Expired Media, Available Media, In Use Media or Full Media. The default setting for this parameter is All Media. Applies to all backup event-driven reports. Select from the following event status options: All Events Successful Events Warning Events Failed Events Use this filter to exclude consecutive errors. This option comes in handy when troubleshooting by limiting the report to servers with excessive activity. Select a number from the drop-down list. Only sets of consecutive errors >= the specified number will be included in the report.

Event Type

Group By

Media Location

Media Status

Event Status

# of Consecutive Errors
Table 2.1

Backup Manager Primary Settings

Report Designer Parameters

Dynamic Report Start & End Times Cascade into subgroups

Table 2.1

Provides the user with the ability to specify dynamic report start and end day and time. Simply specify the number of days before or after the current day as well as the time for both the start and end day and times to be used to generate the report. The report designer default is to cascade to all child sub-groups when generating the report. If you prefer to report ONLY on the server group you selected, then uncheck Cascade into sub-groups.

Backup Manager Primary Settings

Backup Manager Advanced Settings

The availability of selections, options, and default values varies from report to report because not all selections and options apply to all reports.

Start Time / Finish Time Time Zone Parent Job Only Backup Window

Error Code Excludes Ignore Retries Job Types

Enables you to instruct the application to use the event start or finish time as the include trigger when culling the events for inclusion within the time frame specified for the report. Start Time / For example, if you only want to display events that occurred between 12AM and 6:30AM, then specify those times for the start and finish time Finish parameters so that the application filters the events by those time Time constraints. Available in various backup/restore events reports. Enables you to select a specific time zone to normalize the report by any time zone equivalent in the world. The default setting for this parameter is the time zone setting of the Management Server. This option is available only in the Job Status Summary and Job Summary reports. For NetBackup, the Portal groups the jobs with the same parentchild relationship that NetBackup uses. Some customers prefer to see only the status of the parent jobs, so this option enables that selection. Select a custom backup window to be applied to the report. Typically, backups begin at the end of the business day, but they do not finish before the end of the daythereby skewing the success statistics for the day. To more accurately reflect backup SLA metrics, you can re-define a day with a custom backup window. These custom backup windows are defined by the StorageConsole System Administrator.
Backup Manager Advanced Settings

Time Zone

Parent Job Only

Backup Window

Table 2.2

APTARE StorageConsole Report Users Guide

Error Code Excludes

Check the Set Error Excludes box and the application will dynamically generate an Error Code ID/Descriptions Dialogue where you can check all the error codes that need to be excluded from the report. Then, click Accept and all the codes will auto-populate the Exclude Id text box. Any event which exited with an error code specified in the exclude list will not be included in the resulting report. Note: This functionality currently is available only for the Consecutive Errors By Client Report.

Ignore Retries Job Types

Table 2.2

Check this box to indicate that retries for backup jobs should not be incorporated in the statistics shown. Refers to the type of backup job. Each backup product has its own set of job types.

Backup Manager Advanced Settings

Report Designer Parameters

Capacity Manager Primary Settings

The availability of the selections, options within the selections, and default values for the options vary from report to report because not all selections and options apply to all reports.
Storage Arrays Scope Start Date / End Date Threshold Group By Cascade into sub-groups

Storage Arrays

Lists all the storage arrays that the Data Collectors identified.

Use this filter to specify what data will be included in a report.

Scope

To learn more about the report scope, go to About Report Scope.

If you want a static report, specify start and end date in the date format: MM/DD/YYYY. If you want a dynamic reportthat is, a report that changes as the underlying data changesdo not specify a start and end date, as the default always represents the current day. For Capacity At Risk reports only, limit the report output to a threshold category:
Threshold

Start Date / End Date

Low Warning Critical

Table 2.3

Capacity Manager Primary Settings

APTARE StorageConsole Report Users Guide

Group By

Use the drop-down list to specify how you want the data in the bar charts or tables to be grouped. The available options are dependent on the type of report. Some reports group by time, while others group data by either server, client, or policy. The report designer default is to cascade to all child subgroups when generating the report. If you prefer to report ONLY on the server group you selected, then uncheck Cascade into sub-groups.

Cascade into subgroups

Table 2.3

Capacity Manager Primary Settings

Capacity Manager Advanced Settings

The availability of the selections, options within the selections, and default values for the options vary from report to report because not all selections and options apply to all reports.

Capacity
Table 2.4

Enables you to specify the output in Terabytes, Gigabytes, or Megabytes. For consistency, consider using the same capacity for all reports.
Capacity Manager Advanced Settings

Report Designer Parameters

Generating Reports
The default reports meet most users needs. However, if the default reports do not include the fields that you need, create a custom report. See Using Report Template Designer on page 56.. To generate a report based on a default report:
Before You Begin

Identify the report that represents the reporting data that you want. View the list of reports in the report group folders in the Navigation pane. 1. From the Navigation pane, select the report that you want to generate. The Report Designer launches.

The Report Designer window is unique to the report you are generating, displaying only the parameters that are relevant to the specific report. 2. Specify the report parameters, then click Generate. Report Designer renders the report in the Content pane and displays the Toolbar from which you can perform other tasks. If there is no data on which to report, a report will not be generated. Note: When the Portal determines that a large amount of data has been returned for display, the resulting report window provides paging links: Previous and Next.
Next Step

After generating a report you can do a few things:

Save the report. Go to Saving Reports. Schedule an automated report based on the report you generated.Go to Scheduling Emailed Reports on page 39. Instantly email the report to yourself or others. Go to Emailing Reports on page 38. Export the saved report in one of the following common formats: HTML or CSV. Share a report to a message group.

APTARE StorageConsole Report Users Guide

Advanced Filtering for Tabular Reports

In addition to the filtering that is achieved in the Report Designer window, tableformatted reports can be further filtered on Rows and/or Columns, using the following procedures.
Note: To optimize performance, be sure to use the filtering thats available in the Report Designer before using any advanced filtering.

Filter Report Rows

When you filter rows, you define the criteria for the data rows you want to see in the report. Drop-down lists enable selection from the available columns. Then, you supply the operatorsuch as equals or does not containand a value for that column. Up to 4 criteria selections can be joined to form the filter.
Note: Reports can have both row and column filters applied. 1. Generate a table report, such as the Job Summary or the VM Summary report. 2. In the output window of the report, right-click select Filter. 3. In the first drop-down list, select a column name. 4. In the second drop-down list, select an operator. Operator equals
1

not equal1 greater than less than greater than or equal to less than or equal to contains1

does not contain1

Description Filters rows where the value of the associated column is equal to the value entered. The column can be of the type Number, Date or String. Filters rows where the value of the associated column is not equal to the value entered. The column can be of the type Number, Date or String. Filters rows where the value of the associated column is greater to the value entered. The column can be of the type Number or Date. Filters rows where the value of the associated column is smaller than the value entered. The column can be of the type Number or Date. Filters rows where the value of the associated column is greater than or equal to the value entered. The column can be of the type Number or Date. Filters rows where the value of the associated column is smaller than or equal to the value entered. The column can be of the type Number or Date. Filters rows where the value entered is present anywhere in the value of the associated column. Example: If the column value is rattle and the value entered is rat or at the row will be displayed. The column can only be of the type String. Filters rows where the value entered is not present anywhere in the value of the associated column. The column only can be of the type String.

Advanced Filtering for Tabular Reports

Filters rows where the value of the associated column is equal to any of the comma-separated values entered. Example: If you enter a value chair, table, desk and the column value is table the row will be displayed. The column can be of the type Number or String. Excludes Filters rows where the value of the associated column is not equal to any of the comma-separated values entered. The column can be of the type Number or String. matches regular expression Filters rows where the value of associated column matches the regular expression2 entered. The column can only be of the type String. does not match regular Filters rows where the value of associated column does not match expression the regular expression2 entered. The column can only be of the type String. 5. When filtering on Indicator Lights, as shown in the following example, filter on the color: Red, Yellow, Green, or Gray.

Includes

6. To combine several expressions into one filter, select an and or or operator from the dropdown list at the end of the row. 7. Click OK to re-generate the report with the filter applied. The report will now contain a filter applied link, enabling access to the defined filter. When you save this report instance, the filter is saved with it.

APTARE StorageConsole Report Users Guide

Filter Report Columns

When you filter columns, you check the columns that you want to appear in the report and uncheck the columns that you want displayed.
Note: Reports can have both row and column filters applied. 1. Generate a table report, such as the Job Summary or the VM Summary report. 2. In the output window of the report, right-click select Filter. 3. In the Report Filtering window, click the Columns tab to view the list of columns. All of the columns initially will be checked. 4. Uncheck the columns that you want to remove from the report. 5. Click OK to re-generate the report with the filter applied. The report will now contain a filter applied link, enabling access to the defined filter. When you save this report instance, the filter is saved with it.

Sorting Columns in Reports

For reports that display data in tables, you can easily change the order that data is displayed in columns. To sort columns in a table report:
From the report, click on any of the table headings to sort the data for that heading in ascending order. From the report, click the heading a second time to sort by descending order. To return to the reports original order, click the Customize button and Re-Generate the report.

Setting Refresh Intervals

Once you have generated and saved a report, you may want to periodically refresh the data that is displayed. The following characteristics apply to refresh intervals:
A report or dashboard first must be saved before a refresh interval can be configured. Available refresh intervals include: 3, 5, 10, or 15 minutes. A report that is refreshing will have its last refresh time displayed in the tab of the window. Refresh intervals are not persistentthat is, once a report is closed, its refresh setting is cleared. To cancel a report that is refreshing, simply close the tab.

Sorting Columns in Reports

To set a report or dashboard to refresh its display every few minutes, use the following procedure.
1. Generate the report and save it. A report must be saved in order to have the refresh capability associated with it. 2. Right-click within the content of the report window to display a context menu. 3. Select Set Refresh Interval from the context menu. 4. Set the refresh rate to 3, 5, 10 or 15 minutes and click OK.

Modifying Reports
You can modify the parameters of a report instance. After you generate a report, the Report Designer renders the report in the browser window, along withe a report toolbar from which you can choose to customize (modify) the report instance. To modify a report instance:
1. Click on the report instance that you want to modify. The Report Designer renders the report and displays a Toolbar in the Content pane. 2. From the Toolbar, click Customize. 3. Change the report parameters, then click Re-Generate.

See Saving Reports for details on saving report instances.

APTARE StorageConsole Report Users Guide

Saving Reports
Recall that you only can save a report instancethat is, a report that you generated, based on one of a default Report Templates. When you save a report instance, you are saving the definition and parameters, not the report output. Because the Report Designer saves the reporting parameters only, not the actual report data, you do not need to worry about running out of disk space. Each time you launch a report instance, the reports data refreshes.
Note: To capture report output into a saved file, use the export feature, Exporting Reports.

When you generate a report, the Report Designer renders the report in the Content pane and then displays the Toolbar from which you can choose to save the report instance. When you save a report, the report instances parameters are saved in the Reporting Database. Once you create a report instance, it remains in the Reporting Database until you delete it. To save a report instance:
Before You Begin

Generate the report if you have not already done so. See Generating Reports on page 26.. 1. From the report, in the Content pane, click Save. 2. In the Save Report dialog box, specify a descriptive report name, then click Save. The Report Designer saves the report instance under the report template (folder) in which you created the report.

To rename or copy a report instance:

1. Generate the saved report instance. 2. Click Replace to overwrite the current instance or Copy to create a copy of the instance. The copy can have a duplicate name or you can modify the name (recommended) before copying the instance. If you intend to access this report instance often, consider adding it to your My Reports or to your dashboard. Go to Creating Dashboards on page 50 or Adding Reports to Dashboards on page 51.

Next Step

Saving Reports

Deleting Reports
You cannot delete default reports, but you can delete report instances that you created based on a default report. When you delete a report instance, you permanently delete it from the Reporting Database. To delete a report instance:
1. From the Navigation pane, right-click on the report instance that you want to delete. 2. From the shortcut menu, click Delete Saved Report and then confirm your selection.

Searching for a Report

Use the Report Finder to locate a report. Report Finder searches both saved report instances and default report templates. To search for a report:
1. From the Navigation pane, locate the Report Finder search bar.

2. In the search box, type in one or more keywords represented in the report name, then click Find. A list of reports matching your keywords appears in the Navigation pane. 3. To return the Navigation pane to its original list, click Clear.

Report Finder supports a partial-name search. For example, if youre looking for all reports related to service-level agreements, you can type SLA to list all relevant reports. Note that if you establish a standard report-naming convention, this type of search will be more fruitful.

APTARE StorageConsole Report Users Guide

APTARE StorageConsole Release Notes, v6.5

Chapter2

Distributing, Sharing, Scheduling, Alerting

This chapter covers the following topics: Exporting Reports Scheduling Exported Reports Emailing Reports Scheduling Emailed Reports Scheduled Reports Administration Deleting Scheduled Reports Alerting Sharing Reports Technical Community Sharing Adding Notes to Backup Job Details

Exporting Reports
If you need to make the report data available to an external application or just save it as a hardcopy report, you can export a report to a file. The date for the report will be the date and time that the report was generated. The date and time are derived from the Portal Servers time zone, which was determined when your administrator installed the Portal.
Note: The exporting procedures described in this section should not be confused with exporting a Custom Report definition (created in the Report Template Designer). This information can be found in Exporting/Importing Report Templates.

To export report data or schedule an export report run:

Before You Begin

Generate the report if you have not already done so. Go to Generating Reports on page 26. 1. From the report that you want to export, at the top right of the content pane, click Export.

2. In the Export Report dialog box, choose the format. Choose among the standard formats. Note: Dashboards can be exported only in HTML format. CSV (.csv). Use this format if you want to export tabular data to a spreadsheet or a database application such as Microsoft Access. Excel (.xls). Similar to the CSV export, this file supports MS Excel-specific features. XML (.xml). Use this format to access the web page components. PDF (.pdf). This read-only file lends itself to easy distribution and printing. HTML (.html). Use this format if you want to export this data as a web page. Note: The Export-to-HTML process produces a .zip file with all the necessary files. Extract the files and then click on report.html to display the report. Depending on your browsers settings, the file will be saved to your default location (typically, Desktop), or a dialog box launches and requires that you specify the location for the file. 3. Click either Export Now or Schedule. If you choose Export Now, you will be prompted to complete the operationopen or save file. If you choose Schedule, you will be prompted to configure several settings, as shown in Scheduling Exported Reports.

Export the report as

APTARE StorageConsole Report Users Guide

Scheduling Exported Reports

When you schedule a report to be exported on a regular basis, you must first configure a number of settings.

See Expression Builder for details.

Exporting Reports

Use the following table to configure a schedule:

To Schedule the report to run on a regular basis, you must select one of the following options from the Export drop-down list: On a defined schedule - Master schedules can be configured and then applied to reports. Modifications to a master schedule will automatically be applied to all the reports associated with that master schedule. See the Application Administrators Guide. Hourly - Select 1, 2, 3, 4, 6, or 12 hours. Daily - At: hour/minute. Select a specific run time. Weekly On every. Check the day(s) on which the report will run. At: hour/minute. Select a specific run time. Monthly On the. Select the day on which the report will run. At: hour/minute. Select a specific run time. The Portal can run the same report multiple times in a single day. This feature enables you to deploy reports that are viewed by a large audience on a regular basis. Specify a path where the output will be saved, for example, a web server directory. You can append sub-directory information to the beginning of the default path name (/opt/aptare/export). Then, click Validate to ensure that your path specification will work. Note: The scheduler will substitute the underscore character for invalid characters. FOR ADVANCED USERS: In some cases (for example, Managed Services Providers with hundreds of managed server groups), you may want to export to specific server group or report directories. Rather than configure each of these separately, you can use the following variables in the path specification to generate an individual report for each instance of the variable: ${serverGroup} For example: /opt/aptare/export/${serverGroup}/doc ${reportName} To over-write/replace files each time the reports are exported, use the variables: ${day}, ${month}, ${year} where the day, month, and year are represented as 2-digits, such as 02.

Export

Export to the path:*

APTARE StorageConsole Report Users Guide

Choose one of the following: Existing scope - Creates a single report based on the reports scope. Generate reports for: Matching server groups - Creates multiple reports, based on the list that results from the Expression Builder. See Match server groups on: below. Note: Dashboards cannot be exported for multiple server groups. You can specify a regular expression to be used for searching for server group with pattern matching. Then, click Builder to launch the Expression Builder window where you can Evaluate the regular expression to see which server groups are selected. Examples: .*NetBackup.* - the period specifies any character; the asterisk specifies zero or more of the preceding element.
Expression Builder Match server groups on:

[abc] - simple alpha character match [a-zA-Z] - any alpha character in upper or lowercase [^abc] - any character except a, b, or c Note: The Expression Builder is case-sensitive. For additional regular expression details and examples, see: http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Regular_expression

Exporting Reports

Emailing Reports
After you generate a report and the Report Designer renders the report in the Content pane, the Portal displays the Toolbar from which you can choose to instantly email the report. You can email a report to yourself, other individuals, or a distribution list. The Email Report feature comprises both the email function and the report scheduling function. If you want a report to be emailed on a regular basis, see Scheduling Emailed Reports. To email a report:
Before You Begin

Generate the report if you have not already done so. Go to Generating Reports on page 26. 1. From the report that you want to email, at the right of the content pane, locate the report toolbar and click Email.

2. The Email Report dialog box will prompt you for parameters.

3. In the Email Report dialog box, specify your delivery settings:

APTARE StorageConsole Report Users Guide

When you email a report, you do so instantlyNow. However, you also can schedule a saved report, as described in Scheduling Emailed Reports on page 39. The other options in this list are relevant to scheduling report emails at regular intervals. CSV (.csv). Use this format if you want to export tabular data to a spreadsheet or a database application such as Microsoft Access. Excel (.xls). Similar to the CSV export, this file supports MS Excel-specific features. PDF (.pdf). This read-only file lends itself to easy distribution and printing. HTML (.html). Use this format if you want to export this data as a web page. Image (.gif). Use this image format as a read-only choice. Provide a comma-separated list of email addresses. Specify an email subject if you want to override the report title. Sometimes reports contain hyperlinks. When you email a report that contains links, these links remain active unless the report instance no longer appears in the Reporting Database. For security purposes, you might not want the links active, in the event that a report user becomes unauthorized to view the report in the future.

Email as

Email to Subject

Use Live links

4. Only saved reports can be scheduled for delivery on a regular basis (see Scheduling Emailed Reports). Click Email Now for reports that have not been saved or if you simply want to email a saved report immediately.

Scheduling Emailed Reports

When you schedule a report, you actually are configuring it to run and be emailed at regular intervals. To schedule a report, you must first save it. Then, after you generate the saved report, you can configure it to run and be emailed on a regular basis. To email a report at regularly scheduled intervals:
Before You Begin

Generate the report if you have not already done so, and then save it. Go to Generating Reports on page 26. 1. From the saved report that you want to schedule, at the right of the content pane, locate the report toolbar and click Email.

The Email Report dialog box will prompt you for additional parameters.

Emailing Reports

APTARE StorageConsole Report Users Guide

2. In the Email Report dialog box, specify your delivery settings: To Schedule the report to run on a regular basis, you must select one of the following options from the Email drop-down list: Defined Schedule, Hourly, Daily, Weekly, or Monthly. On a defined schedule - Master schedules can be configured and then applied to reports. Modifications to a master schedule will automatically be applied to all the reports associated with that master schedule. See the Application Administrators Guide. Hourly - Select 1, 2, 3, 4, 6, or 12 hours. Daily - At: hour/minute. Select a specific run time. Weekly On every. Check the day(s) on which the report will run. At: hour/minute. Select a specific run time. Monthly On the. Select the day on which the report will run. At: hour/minute. Select a specific run time. The Portal can run the same report multiple times in a single day.
Email as Email to Email if empty

Currently, the only available option is HTML. Provide a comma-separated list of email addresses. This option is available only when you are scheduling a tabular report to be emailed at regular intervals. Sometimes reports might not have any data. If you dont want to email empty reports, choose No.

Emailing Reports

Scheduled Reports Administration

The scheduled reports that you can access depend on your user type:
If you are an Administrator, you can view your scheduled reports and all users scheduled reports. If you are not an Administrator, you can view your scheduled reports and those that belong to other users in your home group.

From the Portal toolbar, choose Report > My Scheduled Reports.

See Expression Builder for details.

Note: The Scheduled Reports Administration options will differ depending on how the report was scheduled, either as an email or a file export. Refer to Scheduling Emailed Reports and Scheduling Exported Reports for details.

APTARE StorageConsole Report Users Guide

Deleting Scheduled Reports

Scheduled reports can be deleted by first viewing the list of scheduled reports and then deleting selected reports. To delete a scheduled report:
1. From the Portal toolbar, choose Report > My Scheduled Reports. A list of scheduled reports appears in the Scheduled Reports Administration window. 2. Use the typical Ctrl-click and Shift-click mouse functions to select reports and then click Delete.

Scheduled Reports Administration

Alerting
Use the alerting feature to notify you when a tabular report has been populated with data. For example, save a Job Summary report for Failed Events and then configure an alert for this report. The Portal will check, according to the schedule you select, for a report that contains data. An alert can be delivered via the following mechanisms, described in detail later in this section:
Email Script SNMP

Configuring an Alert for a Tabular Report Instance

Alerting can be configured for any report that contains a single table. Use the following procedure to configure an alert for a report.
1. Save a report instance. 2. Generate the saved instance. 3. Right-click in the report window to launch the Alerting window.

4. Use the following table to configure an alert:

APTARE StorageConsole Report Users Guide

Schedule an Alert

To Schedule a report to be checked for alerts on a regular basis, you must select one of the following options from the drop-down list: On a defined schedule - Master schedules can be configured and then applied to reports. Modifications to a master schedule will automatically be applied to all the reports associated with that master schedule. See the Application Administrators Guide. Hourly - Select 1, 2, 3, 4, 6, or 12 hours. Daily - At: hour/minute. Select a specific time. Weekly On every. Check the day(s) on which the report will be checked. At: hour/minute. Select a specific time. Monthly On the. Select the day on which the report will be checked. At: hour/minute. Select a specific time. The Portal can check the same report multiple times in a single day.

Check the box and provide a comma-separated list of email addresses. The user-created script needs to reside in:
/opt/aptare/user_scripts

Script

Check the box and enter a shell script name (UNIX). If a path name is included, it will be appended to the above path. For example, filter a report to include only the columns that will supply values to your ticketing system. The script should include variables that match the report columns so that the values can be passed on to your ticketing system. When you check this box, the Port, Community string, and Management servers fields will be populated from the configured defaults. To override the defaults, overwrite any or all of the three SNMP fields. Administrators: To configure SNMP default values, see Adding/ Configuring a Domain in the Application Administrators Guide.

SNMP

5. Click OK to save the alert configuration. 6. To view the alerts, select Report > My Scheduled Reports. For details on managing alerts in the Scheduled Reports list, see Scheduled Reports Administration.

Alerting

Sharing Reports
You cannot share report templates, but you can share saved report instances. This procedure assumes that you already created and saved the report that you want to share. You can share a report with any number of users or user groups, however, the users must be part of a group.

To share a report:
1. From the report that you want to share, at the right of the content pane, locate the report toolbar and click Share. A pop-up window presents you with a list of users and groups. 2. Select any number of users or user groups using typical Ctrl-click and Shift-click actions and then click Share.

To access reports that you shared with others: From the Portal toolbar, choose Report > My Shared Reports. To access reports that others shared with you: From the Portal Navigation pane at the left of the window, click on the Shared Reports menu group.

Technical Community Sharing

A Community News Group offers a forum for sharing not only product news, but tips, questions, and strategies for using various products and reports. In addition, Report Template Designer SQL queries are posted in the forums Report Exchange. The Forum is accessible in the following ways:
In the Portal: Help > Forum URL in browser: http://newsgroup.storageconsole.com

Adding Notes to Backup Job Details

Notes associated with backup job details enable you to fulfill compliance audit requirements. When a backup job fails, you can use notes to document remediation steps taken. You can attach a note to a backup jobs detail. You can use notes to:
Specify the cause of a failed job, and how you or a third party resolved the problem. Provide an audit trail. Share information with others.

APTARE StorageConsole Report Users Guide

For details about notes, see the Job Details Report. Also, see Example of Listing Jobs With Notes.

Adding Notes to Backup Job Details

APTARE StorageConsole Report Users Guide

APTARE StorageConsole Release Notes, v6.5

4
Chapter2

Organizing Reports

This chapter covers the following topics: Task Overview: Organizing Reports Creating Dashboards Adding Reports to Dashboards Deleting Reports from Dashboards Adding Reports to a Custom Menu Group Creating a Custom Menu Group Changing Your Home Page

Task Overview: Organizing Reports

So that you can easily retrieve your reports, consider using the following features to organize your reports:
Dashboards My Reports Custom Menu Group Home Page Setup

To organize your reports, perform the following sequence of steps:

Task For Instructions

1. If you have reports that you need to access daily or throughout the day, create dashboards and add reports to those dashboards. 2. If you have reports that you need to access regularly, add those reports to My Reports. 3. Organize your reports into logical groupings by creating custom menu groups.

Creating Dashboards Adding Reports to Dashboards Adding Reports to a Custom Menu Group Creating a Custom Menu Group

Task Overview: Organizing Reports

Creating Dashboards
Dashboards provide easy access to your reports. A dashboard is a canvas to which you can drag and drop reports. Consider creating a dashboard to contain reports that you need to access regularly and quickly. More importantly, use dashboards to view multiple scenarios simultaneously. The Portal provides several default dashboards, and you can easily create your own. Use dashboards to combine multiple reports into one view:
To monitor running jobs for three different backup servers, run each independent report and then group them into a single dashboard. To troubleshoot a particular backup problem, you can gather data from multiple reports in one view. Dashboard Example

By correlating data from multiple reports, you can determine if your storage units are functioning properly.
1. Using the Real Time Library and Drive Status report, you can determine if drives are available. 2. Then, in the Running and Queued Jobs Summary, you can see what jobs are currently running. If there are jobs in the queue for a storage unit, and there are also drives available within a storage unit, something may be preventing the queued jobs from moving to the running status. Note: If you need to access specific reports regularly and quickly, but do not need to view these reports simultaneously because the reports are independent of each other, simply add these reports to your My Reports menu group instead.

To create a dashboard:
1. From the Portal toolbar, choose Report > New Dashboard. The New Dashboard dialog box appears. You also can create a new dashboard by right-clicking in any part of the Portal window (even within a report) and then selecting New Dashboard. 2. Generate each report that you want to be included in the dashboard you are developing. 3. Once all of the reports are generated, click on the tab of the New Dashboard that you started. 4. Click and drag the tab of each report that you want to place into the dashboard. These reports will become portlets within the dashboard. Youll notice as you drag the report into the dashboard, a blank grayed-out pane appears before the report docks in the dashboard. Once the portlets are placed in a dashboard, you can re-position them by dragging them to a new position. Add the relevant reports to your dashboard. Go to Adding Reports to Dashboards on page 51.

APTARE StorageConsole Report Users Guide

Adding Reports to Dashboards

You can add report instances that you create to a personal dashboard. There is no limit to the number of reports that you can add to a personal dashboard. Each time you add a report to your dashboard, the reports appear side by side in the same window pane.
Note: A report that has been generated as a result of a drill-down in another report cannot be saved or added to a dashboard.

To add a report to a new dashboard:

1. From the report, right-click on the chart and choose New Dashboard. 2. In the New Dashboard text box, type the name of the dashboard and click Create.

To add reports to an existing dashboard:

1. Generate the dashboard, as shown in the previous procedure. 2. From the Navigation pane, click on the report that you want to add to your dashboard and generate that report. 3. Go to the tab of the report at the top of the window and drag the report to your Dashboard menu group. This report will become a portlet within the dashboard.

Dashboard Example

Adding Reports to Dashboards

To add saved reports to an existing dashboard:

1. Create a new dashboard or open an existing dashboard. 2. Grab the saved report name from the menu list at the left of the Portal window and drag it into the dashboard, dropping it into place when you see a gray rectangle, as shown in the following example:

Deleting Reports from Dashboards

As you use your custom-designed dashboards, you may find that some reports arent relevant to the context that youve created. To remove a report from a dashboard: From the dashboard, right-click on the report portlet that you want to remove, then click Remove Portlet From Dashboard.

APTARE StorageConsole Report Users Guide

Adding Reports to a Custom Menu Group

If you need to access specific and unrelated reports regularly and quickly, simply add these saved report instances to your My Reports menu group or a Custom Menu group (see Creating a Custom Menu Group). Both custom report templates and saved report instances can be placed into this group. This section describes the process of adding saved report instances to My Reports. To add reports to My Reports or a custom menu group:
1. Click on the report instance and drag it on top of the My Reports or custom menu group. When you drag a report to the My Reports menu group, place the report name on top of the menu group label before dropping it into the group.

When you place a saved report instance into this menu group, the menu item simply points to the actual report instance. Therefore, if you delete the saved report instance, it automatically will be removed from My Reports or the custom menu group.

Creating a Custom Menu Group

Once you have accumulated several saved report instances and report templates, you may find that you can better organize them by creating your own menu groups within the My Reports group. To create a Custom Menu Group in the My Reports group:
1. Right-click on top of My Reports and select New Menu Group.

2. Drag saved report instances and drop them onto the name of this Custom Menu Group. 3. You can right-click and take the following actions:

Adding Reports to a Custom Menu Group

Changing Your Home Page

The Home page is associated with a User and it is displayed when the user logs in. the Portal ships with a default home page, however, each user can set a different report as his home page. To display your home page: From the Portal Toolbar, select Report > Go To My Homepage. To change your home page: From the report, right-click on the chart or table, then choose Set As My Homepage.

In the top left of the window, youll see the status of this action: Homepage set...

APTARE StorageConsole Report Users Guide

5
Chapter2

Custom Reports

This chapter covers the following topics: Using Report Template Designer Creating a Custom Report Template Configure Report Designer Components Specify the SQL Query Sample Queries Using Functions in Queries Format the Output Edit a Custom Report Template Exporting/Importing Report Templates

About Custom Reports

The Portal comes packaged with a set of default report templates. You can customize these Backup Manager and Capacity Manager templates in a number of ways:
narrow the report scope to specific server groups modify parameters, such as the time period or event type.

After you have customized a default report, you can save it with its new parameters for on-going use. See About the Report Designer for details. In addition to customizing default report templates, you can create your own dashboards to combine several reports into one view. See Creating Dashboards for details. Once youve become familiar with the default reports and also the types of data collected, you may want to design reports that serve your unique reporting needs. See Using Report Template Designer for details.

About Custom Reports

Using Report Template Designer

Use the Report Template Designer to create custom reports. To access custom reports created by other StorageConsole users, go to the Report Exchange section of the Community Forum: Help > Forum

To create a custom report template:

From the Portal toolbar, select Report > Template Designer.

The initial display of the Report Template Designer window begins with the Report Designer components. In this window, you can either:

APTARE StorageConsole Report Users Guide

Select components to be used to construct the report template. Configure components to customize the way they are presented in the Report Template. See Configure Report Designer Components. 1. Report Designer 2. Query 3. Formatting 4. Save & Share

To navigate the Report Template Designer, use either the tabs at the top of the window, or click Next at the bottom of the window.

Using Report Template Designer

Report Designer

Using the checkboxes, specify which parameters you want the user to specify in the Report Designer window, when the report is generated.
Date Range Time Period - See Date Range for particulars. Server Groups and Client Scope - See Server Groups and Client Scope. Custom Text Fields - See Custom Text Fields for a description and example. Custom Combo Box - See Custom Combo Box for details.

To customize any of the above options, see Configure Report Designer Components. After you complete the selections within the tabbed Report Designer window, click on Next to go to the Query window where you will Specify the SQL Query.
Query

Formatting

Save & Share

The Query provides a window in which you must type your SQL statement. In addition, a list of valid database views and fields can be used to create your select statement. When you click Validate, the Report Designer checks your SQL statement for valid syntax before you can exit the designer. See Specify the SQL Query. To format the output for a report template, select the information that you want included in the report, as well as the report output style Table, Bar Chart, or Pie Chart. See Format the Output. Save and share custom report templates with others. You can select individual users or groups, and also the menu group in which it will appear. Once you have saved a report template, you can edit the template. See Edit a Custom Report Template.

APTARE StorageConsole Report Users Guide

Creating a Custom Report Template

The Report Template Designer supports select statements. You cannot specify UPDATE, DROP, ALTER, or CREATE statements. After creating a Custom SQL report, it can be saved and shared for future use. When you save the report, you can select the report group under which it will appear in the Navigation pane. Using the Report Template Designer, take the following steps to create custom reports for your environment:
Configure Report Designer Components Specify the SQL Query Format the Output

Configure Report Designer Components

When you create a Custom Report, you can provide the user with a Report Designer interface, similar to the out-of-the box StorageConsole reports. Then, each time a report instance is generated from the Report Template, the user can select parameters to be used for report generation.

Date Range
Configure this component to provide the time with the date range. Choose Yes or No to specify if the time will be shown along with the date range.

Server Groups and Client Scope

This Report Designer component enables you to customize how the report will display the server groups data.

Use this configuration to specify if the cascade to sub-groups option is available and, if available, the default settingChecked or Unchecked.

Creating a Custom Report Template

Custom Text Fields

This Report Designer option broadens the capabilities of the custom report query. In the Report Template Designer, a user can define fields that then can be substituted into a query. When the report is generated, the Report Designer window presents the fields that can be selected, thus providing dynamic input for the report instance. This option enables you to create three free-form text fields, where you can specify a field that you want to use in your query. For example, you might enter Host Name, so that when you form the query, you can specify a host name to be inserted into the query.
Example

The following steps illustrate the advantage of Custom Text Fields.

1. In the Report Template Designer, select the Custom Text Fields component and click Configure.

2. In the Custom Text Fields configuration window, define a field named Host ID and click OK. 3. To use this newly configured Custom Text Field, be sure to select the checkbox. 4. In the Query window, enter the following SQL query by typing a partial statement and then double-clicking to select fields:

APTARE StorageConsole Report Users Guide

select * from aps_v_host_volume where host_id > ${freeText1}

This query can be constructed by combining typing with double-clicking selections in the window, as shown in the following example:

The resulting query will be:

select * from aps_v_host_volume where aps_v_host_volume.host_id < ${freeText1}

5. Click Validate Query. 6. In the Formatting window, select all the fields for a table. 7. Save the report template with a name and a menu group. 8. Generate the report from this report template and in its Report Designer window, provide a value for the Host ID field. This value will be passed to the query.

Creating a Custom Report Template

Custom Combo Box

The Report Designer component enables the flexibility of offering the selection of various characteristics when the report is generatedsimilar to the way the out-of-thebox reports handle options, such as Event Type or Job Type. Specify a heading, along with a list of values that will be displayed as a drop-down selection.

To include a blank or no choice option, specify the list of values in the form:
,option 1,option 2

If this no choice option is selected when the report is generated, an empty string will be passed to the SQL expression.
Example of a Combo Box 1. Create a Custom Combo Box to enable the user to select all servers for a particular Make:

2. This Combo Box can be used in a query, such as:

select * from apt_v_server where apt_v_server.make = '${freeCombo}'

Note: The Combo Box variable is a string, so it must be enclosed in single straight quotes when it will be evaluated with a text field, as shown in the above example. 3. Format this report as a table. 4. Save it as List Servers by Make in a Menu Group. 5. Generate a report from this newly saved report template. In this example, a Combo Box heading was specified with a list of values that will be presented in a drop-down list in the Report Designer, when the user generates the report:

APTARE StorageConsole Report Users Guide

6. Select a Make from the drop-down list and click Generate.

Creating a Custom Report Template

Specify the SQL Query

To see the available database views and fields that can be used when you create a query, see the StorageConsole Database Programmers Guide.
1. In the Query window, construct your select statement using the following tips: Use the drop-down list at the bottom left of the window to select views and fields. Use these lists to look up the valid tables, fields, and variables. Double-click on fields to insert them into the query with the correct syntax. Double-click on variables in the list at the right of the window, to insert variables with proper syntax into the queryfor example, ${endDate} If you checked Server Group and Client Scope in the initial tabbed Report Designer window, youll see that the drop-down list of Report Designer Variables (at the right of the window) includes Report Scope selections. Using these selections, you can enumerate a list of values for Server Groups (serverGroups) and Clients (hosts). For examples of queries, see Sample Queries. 2. Click Validate Query. Correct the statement before you proceed. Use the available lists to look up the valid tables, fields, and variables. Once the query validates, click Next to proceed to Format the Output.

APTARE StorageConsole Report Users Guide

Sample Queries
The following queries can serve as a starting point to give you ideas of how to create your own custom queries. In fact, you simply can copy and paste a query from these examples to demonstrate the results in the Report Template Designer.

Technical Community Report Sharing

Additional SQL queries are posted by the user community on the News Group Forum (Report Exchange), accessible in the following ways:
In the Portal: Help > Forum URL in browser: http://newsgroup.storageconsole.com

Example of a Report of Failed Backup Jobs

The following example results in a list of failed jobs.
1. In the Report Template Designer, check both Date Range and Server Groups and Client Scope. 2. In the Query window, enter the following select statement and click Validate Query:
SELECT apt_v_job.job_id,apt_v_job.client_id, apt_v_job.client_name, apt_v_job.server_id, apt_v_job.server_name, apt_v_job.start_date,apt_v_job.vendor_state_name, apt_v_job.vendor_status_name FROM apt_v_job WHERE apt_v_job.summary_status = 2 --Failed jobs AND apt_v_job.start_date > ${startDate} AND apt_v_job.start_date < ${endDate} AND apt_v_job.client_id IN (${hosts})

3. In the Formatting window, select the fields to be displayed. For this example, it makes sense to Select All and display the report as a Table. 4. Click Next, enter a report name and select a Menu Group. Then, click Finish. 5. When you run this report, specify either a time period or start and end dates. You also can modify the scope to generate the report for a specific server group. The output will look something like this:

Creating a Custom Report Template

Example of a Server Group Membership List

The following example reports on server group membership, in display name order.
1. In the Report Template Designer, check only Server Groups and Client Scope. 2. In the Query window, enter the following select statement and click Validate Query:
SELECT g.group_name, s.server_id, s.display_name client, s.hostname, s.ip_address FROM apt_v_group_member m, apt_v_group g, apt_v_server s WHERE g.group_id = m.group_id AND m.child_type = 2 --Server (excludes children that are server groups) AND m.child_id = s.server_id AND s.server_id IN (${hosts}) ORDER BY s.display_name, g.group_name

3. In the Formatting window, select the fields to be displayed. For this example, it makes sense to select all and display the report as a Table. 4. Click Next, enter a report name and select a Menu Group. Then, click Finish. 5. When you run this report, you can modify the scope to generate the report for a specific server group. The output will look something like this:

Note that the column header client was substituted for the field name, as specified in the query. You can specify similar substitutions using the Formatting window in the Report Template Designer. 6. Since this query is ordered by display name and then group name, it may be more reasonable to display the output in a similar fashion. Use the Formatting tab to re-arrange the table columns (Move Up, Move Down). See Format the Output.

APTARE StorageConsole Report Users Guide

Example of an Exposed Clients Report

The following example lists the clients within the report scope that have not been backed up within the selected time frame.
1. In the Report Template Designer, check both Date Range and Server Groups and Client Scope. 2. In the Query window, enter the following select statement and click Validate Query:
SELECT apt_v_job.client_id, apt_v_job.client_name, apt_v_job.server_id, apt_v_job.server_name FROM apt_v_job WHERE apt_v_job.client_id IN (${hosts}) AND apt_v_job.summary_status IN (0,1) -- Success or Warning HAVING MAX(start_date) < ${startDate} GROUP BY apt_v_job.client_id, apt_v_job.client_name, apt_v_job.server_id, apt_v_job.server_name

3. In the Formatting window, select the fields to be displayed. For this example, it makes sense to select all and display the report as a Table. 4. Click Next, enter a report name and click Finish. 5. When you run this report, specify the start and end dates or a time period. So, for example, you could select Last 72 Hours and it will be substituted for startDate, listed in the query. You can modify the scope to generate the report for a specific server group. The output will look something like this:

Creating a Custom Report Template

Example of Listing Jobs With Notes

The following example lists the jobs with notes within the selected time frame, ordered by server, client, job start date, and note entry date. This particular report provides a quick look at jobs that may need attention because someone has attached a note to the job.
1. In the Report Template Designer, check both Date Range and Server Groups and Client Scope. 2. In the Query window, enter the following select statement and click Validate Query:
SELECT n.note_date, n.user_id, n.user_note, j.client_name, j.server_name, j.job_type_name, j.start_date, j.finish_date FROM apt_v_job j, apt_v_job_note n WHERE j.job_id = n.job_id AND j.client_id IN (${hosts}) AND j.start_date BETWEEN ${startDate} AND ${endDate} ORDER BY j.server_name, j.client_name, j.start_date, n.note_date

3. In the Formatting window, select the fields to be displayed. For this example, it makes sense to select all and display the report as a Table. 4. Click Next, enter a report name and click Finish. 5. When you run this report, try these selections: Time Period: Month-to-Date Check Cascade into sub-groups The output will look something like this:

APTARE StorageConsole Report Users Guide

Example of a Pie Chart for Job Size by Job Type

The following example creates a pie chart that represents the various job typessuch as, application backups, full backups, incremental backups, and restoresas segments in a pie chart.
1. In the Report Template Designer, do not check any Report Designer items. 2. In the Query window, enter the following select statement and click Validate Query:
SELECT job_type_name, sum(kilobytes/1024/1024) Job_SIZE_GB FROM APT_V_NBU_JOB_DETAIL WHERE finish_date > sysdate -7 AND job_type_name IS NOT NULL GROUP BY job_type_name ORDER BY job_type_name

3. In the Formatting window, select Pie Chart from the Display report as drop-down list. 4. For the Caption field, select job_type_name from the drop-down list. 5. Select all the fields to be displayed. For a pie chart, you need at least one field to be the caption and another field to be the segment.

6. Click Next, enter a report name and Menu Group. Then, click Finish.

Creating a Custom Report Template

7. When you run this report, the output will look something like this:

Example of the SQL Custom Join Feature

Backup Exec data collection does not populate tables related to tape mediafor example, apt_v_tape_media. To include this view in a query so that it will work with Backup Exec data, youll need to use an outer join (as denoted with (+) in the following query).
select apt_v_job.server_name, apt_v_job.job_type, apt_v_job_tape_media.media_name, apt_v_job.client_name, to_char(apt_v_job.start_date, 'YYYY-MM-DD hh:mm:ss AM') start_date, to_char(apt_v_job.finish_date, 'YYYY-MM-DD hh:mm:ss AM') finish_date, apt_v_job.summary_status, apt_v_job_message_log.message, apt_v_job_tape_media.tape_media_id, apt_v_job.kilobytes from apt_v_job, apt_v_job_tape_media, apt_v_job_message_log where apt_v_job.job_id = apt_v_job_tape_media.job_id (+) and apt_v_job.job_id = apt_v_job_message_log.job_id and apt_v_job.server_id in (${rp.hosts}) and apt_v_job.start_date BETWEEN ${rp.startDate} AND ${rp.endDate} ORDER BY apt_v_job.server_name, apt_v_job.start_date

Example of NetBackup Catalog Space by Client List

This example demonstrates how to include sums of a field.
1. In the Report Template Designer, check Server Groups and Client Scope. 2. In the Query window, enter the following select statement and click Validate Query:
SELECT client_host_name, sum(nbr_of_files),sum(nbr_of_files)*150/1024/1024 FROM apt_v_nbu_job_detail WHERE client_id in (${hosts}) AND summary_status is not null AND expiration_date <= sysdate GROUP BY client_host_name ORDER BY sum(nbr_of_files) DESC

3. In the Formatting window, select all the fields to be displayed and display the report as a Table. 4. Click Next, enter a report name and click Finish. The output will look something like this:

APTARE StorageConsole Report Users Guide

Creating a Custom Report Template

Using Functions in Queries

The following functions can be used to further expand the capabilities of the Report Template Designer custom report templates.
Note: In most cases, when inserting a function into a Report Template Designer query, it must be prefaced with: rtd. secsToHoursMinSecs getServerGroupContextById APTlistOfDates APTgetTapeDriveStatusName APTgetJobTypeName listOfBackupWindowDates getServerAttributeValue aptStringConcat

secsToHoursMinSecs
This function is useful for converting job duration to a readable format.
secsToHoursMinSecs(totalSecs IN NUMBER)

Example Query:
select rtd.secsToHoursMinSecs (duration_secs) from apt_v_job

getServerGroupContextById
This function provides the capability for getting specific server group data.
FUNCTION getServerGroupContextById( groupID, clientID, depthLevel)

This function returns a character string. Note that in the Report Template Designer query, the function name must be prefaced with:
rtd.

Specify the following arguments:

Argument Name
groupID clientID

Type Number

Length 6

Number Number

depthLevel

Description This is the highest level server group to be accessed Specify a specific ID. For the purpose of a SQL query, insert a field name from a view, as shown in the following example. This number indicates the number of levels down the hierarchical server group tree you want the query to search.

Example Query:
select rtd.getServerGroupContextById(100000,server_id,3) from apt_v_server

APTARE StorageConsole Report Users Guide

APTlistOfDates
This function enables you to provide a list of dates to a query.
FUNCTION APTlistOfDates( startDate endDate groupBy IN DATE, IN DATE, IN NUMBER)

This function returns a character string. Note that in the Report Template Designer query, the function name must be prefaced with:
rtd.

Example Query:
select * from table(rtd.APTlistOfDates(to_Date('10012008','MMDDYYYY'), to_date('10032008','MMDDYYYY'), 11))

The output from this example:

THE_DATE -------------------01-Oct-2008 00:00:00 02-Oct-2008 00:00:00 03-Oct-2008 00:00:00

The third argumentgroupBycontrols the granularity of the results, as follows:

Value 1 2 10 11 12 13 14 15 Description Group by 15 minutes Group by 30 minutes Group by hour Group by day Group by week Group by month Group by quarter Group by year

Creating a Custom Report Template

APTgetTapeDriveStatusName
Use this function to access data from:
apt_v_tape_drive

This function returns a character string. Note that in the Report Template Designer query, the function name must be prefaced with:
rtd. FUNCTION APTgetTapeDriveStatusName( vendorProductType, vendorDriveStatus)

Argument Name
vendorProductType vendorDriveStatus

Type Number Character

Length

Example Query:
select rtd.APTgetTapeDriveStatusName(d.product_type, d.vendor_drive_status) from apt_v_tape_drive d

The output from this example:

Up In-Use In-Use In-Use Mounting

APTARE StorageConsole Report Users Guide

APTgetJobTypeName
This function can be used to query database tables related to backup job details, such as apt_v_job and apt_v_nbu_job.
FUNCTION APTgetJobTypeName( productType, jobType, vendorJobType)

This function returns a character string. Note that in the Report Template Designer query, the function name must be prefaced with:
rtd.

Argument Name
productType jobType vendorJobType

Type Number Number Number

Length 2 4

Example Query 1:
select rtd.APTgetJobTypeName(j.product_type, j.job_type, NULL) from apt_v_job j

Example Query 2:
select rtd.APTgetJobTypeName(j.product_type, j.job_type, n.vendor_job_type) from apt_v_nbu_job n, apt_v_Job j where j.job_id = n.job_id

The output from this example:

Full Backup Appl Backup Appl Backup

Creating a Custom Report Template

listOfBackupWindowDates
Note that in the Report Template Designer query, the function name must be prefaced with:
rtd.

FUNCTION listOfBackupWindowDates( startDate, finishDate, backupWindowList IN apt_BackupWindowListType)

Argument Name
startDate finishDate backupWindowList

Type Date Date

Based on the backup window definition, the above function returns a list of the adjusted start and finish dates.
Example Query:
SELECT start_date, finish_date FROM TABLE(rtd.LISTOFBACKUPWINDOWDATES(TO_DATE('01012008','MMDDYYYY'), to_DATE('01072008','MMDDYYYY'), apt_BackupWindowListType( APT_BACKUPWINDOWTYPE('Mon', 40, 64), APT_BACKUPWINDOWTYPE('Tue', 64, 88), APT_BACKUPWINDOWTYPE('Wed', 88, 112), APT_BACKUPWINDOWTYPE('Thu', 112, 136), APT_BACKUPWINDOWTYPE('Fri', 136, 160), APT_BACKUPWINDOWTYPE('Sat', 160, 184), APT_BACKUPWINDOWTYPE('Sun', 16, 40) ) ))

The output from this example:

12/31/2007 4:00:00 PM 1/1/2008 4:00:00 PM 1/2/2008 4:00:00 PM 1/3/2008 4:00:00 PM 1/4/2008 4:00:00 PM 1/5/2008 4:00:00 PM 1/6/2008 4:00:00 PM 1/1/2008 3:59:59 PM 1/2/2008 3:59:59 PM 1/3/2008 3:59:59 PM 1/4/2008 3:59:59 PM 1/5/2008 3:59:59 PM 1/6/2008 3:59:59 PM 1/7/2008 3:59:59 PM

APTARE StorageConsole Report Users Guide

getServerAttributeValue
This function returns a stringthe server attribute value. Note that in the Report Template Designer query, the function name must be prefaced with:
rtd. getServerAttributeValue( serverID, attributeName)

Argument Name
serverID attributeName

Type Number String in single quotes

Example Query 1:
select server_id, status FROM ( select server_id, rtd.getserverattributevalue(server_id,'Status') Status from apt_v_server s ) WHERE status IS NOT NULL order by server_id

aptStringConcat
Use this function in a Report Template Designer query to concatenate string values returned from a table.
Example Query
select aptStringConcat(hostname) from apt_v_server where rownum < 10

This query in the Report Template Designer will generate output similar to:

Creating a Custom Report Template

Format the Output

1. From the Formatting tab, specify the following: Output styleDisplay the report as: Table, Bar Chart, Pie Chart, or Pivot Table. Note: When formatting a Pivot Table, only three fields are used (x, y, and a value). Use the Move Up and Move Down feature to position the fields to easily select three fields. Fields from the query that you want to include in the report. Select the checkbox of the query field to indicate the fields to be displayed. Select the Display Field and click Formatting (at the top of the window) to view the formatting options. -->LabelYou can re-label the displayed fields to something more relevant to your needs. -->Data alignmentLeft, Center, or Right. -->Aggregation: Sum, Average, Minimum, Maximum -->Number, Size, and Date and Time patterns.These patterns are based on the Java classes SimpleDataFormat and NumberFormat. -->Type: Bar ChartSee Formatting ExampleBar Chart. -->Type: Pie ChartIf you are formatting a Pie Chart, select a character field from the Caption field drop-down list. The field formatter will show a Type parameter. For pie charts, use numeric fields as pie chart segments. See Example of a Pie Chart for Job Size by Job Type. -->Type: Pivot TableSee Formatting ExamplePivot Table.

APTARE StorageConsole Report Users Guide

2. At the bottom of the Formatting window, use the Move Up and Move Down buttons to organize the fields in the order that you want them to appear in a tabular report. Be sure to select a row before shifting the fields.

Creating a Custom Report Template

3. In the Save & Share window, complete the appropriate text boxes to save and share the report, then click OK. You can choose one or more users and user groups. The saved report template will be listed in the report group that you select.

APTARE StorageConsole Report Users Guide

Formatting ExampleBar Chart

The following example illustrates how to create a Bar Chart and then format it with a dual axis.
1. From the Report Designer tabbed window, select Date Range and Server Groups and Client Scope. 2. Create a query that has a field for the caption, each of the stacked bars, and the line.

3. In the Formatting tabbed section, select the data points and format each so that you have: 1 caption, n bars, and 1 line Note: The line will be charted on the right-hand axis.

Creating a Custom Report Template

4. Set the color of the bars. 5. Specify the line formatting. 6. Save the report to the My Reports report menu group. Then, click on the saved report instance to generate it.

APTARE StorageConsole Report Users Guide

Formatting ExamplePivot Table

The following example illustrates a key Report Template Designer formatting feature Pivot Tables. A pivot table provides a useful mechanism for aggregating and summarizing data. In effect, you are taking the flat rows of data and grouping them into a multi-dimensional representation of the data, enabling easier data analysis. When you format this report, you can have only 3 fields of data, which will be represented in the table as the row, column, and data.
1. From the Report Designer tabbed window, select Date Range and Server Groups and Client Scope and also Custom Combo Box. 2. Select Custom Combo Box and click Configure at the bottom of the Query window.

3. Enter the heading for the drop-down combo boxin this example, Job Size by... 4. Enter the following comma-separated list of values and then click OK: master_host_name, client_host_name, policy_name, policy_type_name, schedule_name, schedule_type_name, storage_unit_label These will be the options that a user can select when generating a report instance.

Creating a Custom Report Template

5. Click on the Query tab and enter the following query:

SELECT to_char(start_date,'MM/DD/YY') run_date, to_char(${freeCombo}) unit, trunc(sum(kilobytes/1024/1024)) size_gb FROM apt_v_nbu_job_detail WHERE start_date BETWEEN ${startDate} AND ${endDate} AND client_id in (${hosts}) GROUP BY to_char(start_date,'MM/DD/YY'), ${freeCombo}

6. Click Validate Query and then Next. 7. In the Formatting window, select all three fields: run_date, unit, and size_gb

8. Save the report to a report menu group. Then, click on the saved report instance to generate it.

APTARE StorageConsole Report Users Guide

Edit a Custom Report Template

Once you have saved a custom-designed report template, you can return to it to edit its configuration. For example, you can modify the SQL query or share it with additional users.

To edit a custom report template:

Right-click on the report template name in the menu group (at the left of the Portal window) and select Edit Report Template.

The Report Template Designer launches so that you can modify the settings. Editing Report Designer Components

When editing any of the Report Designer components listed in the first Report Template Designer window, be sure to first select the component and then click Configure, as shown in the following example:

Creating a Custom Report Template

APTARE StorageConsole Report Users Guide

Exporting/Importing Report Templates

In support of Web 2.0 community sharing, custom report templates can be exported to a file (.rtd) and then imported into another environment. This feature broadens the access to already developed, unique reports that may be ideal for your environment.

Export a Report Template

To export a custom-designed report template from your Portal to a .rtd file:
1. Create and save a custom report template using the instructions in Creating a Custom Report Template. 2. In the Report Navigator pane, right-click on the saved report template and choose Export Report Template.

3. When you confirm your export action in the next window, you are taken to the typical browser open/save file window. 4. Click Save File and OK to save this .rtd file so that it can be shared and imported by others. 5. To Import a Report Template, see Import a Report Template.

Import a Report Template

To import a custom-designed report template, follow these steps.
1. In the toolbar at the top of the Portal window, select Report > Import Template. 2. From the drop-down list, select the destination report folder for the imported template. 3. Browse your local system for the saved template (.rtd) file, select it and click OK. The imported template will appear in the folder you specified and now can be generated. 4. To Export a Report Template, see Export a Report Template.

RECOMMENDATION: Visit the Report Exchange at the online Community Forum for report templates that you can import into your Portal. See Technical Community Report Sharing.

Exporting/Importing Report Templates

APTARE StorageConsole Report Users Guide

APTARE StorageConsole [=qqqe4r5t6y7u78i90op--[=\\ \\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\]]]]]]]]]]] Release Notes, v6.5

Chapter2

System Administration Reports

This chapter covers the following topics: Collector Message Summary Data Collection Message Detail Database Error Summary Report Activity Summary Report Activity Detail Monitoring Data Collection Status Top Running Reports Version History

Collector Message Summary

To access this report, in the Navigation pane select:
System Administration Reports > Collector Message Summary

The Collector Message Summary report lists issues that occurred during the data collection process. Use this report to identify the reason for missing backup and storage capacity status. Currently, data collection messages are available only for:
Legato NetWorker HP Data Protector Capacity Manager Host Resources

Data Collection Messages can be filtered (in the Report Designer) by the following criteria:
by Host (see example above) by Data Collector

APTARE StorageConsole Report Users Guide

by Child Thread

Collection Message Summary

This report is accessed via the Error Occurrences drilldown link in the Collector Message Summary.

Collector Message Summary

Data Collection Message Detail

This report is accessed via the Last Message Date drilldown link in the Collection Message Summary.

APTARE StorageConsole Report Users Guide

Database Error Summary

To access this report, in the Navigation pane select:
System Administration Reports > Database Error Summary

This report provides a diagnostic tool for System Administrators to monitor typical operational functions. More often than not, you will be requested by Customer Care Group to use this diagnostic tool and email the report to them for further investigation. Entries in this report do not necessarily signal problems that require corrective action. For example, if a user inadvertently attempts to create a Domain Name that already exists, an entry will be written to the database error log file and also displayed in this report. Ideally, this report will rarely list errors that require additional actions, but periodic monitoring is recommended.
Note: Given that this report extracts customer-specific database messages from a log file, System Administrators should ensure that only authorized personnel are given access to this report.

Database Error Summary

Report Activity Summary

To access this report, in the Navigation pane select:
System Administration Reports > Database Error Summary

This report presents a graphical representation of the aggregate of the time for Portal report generation.
Mouse over a bar to view the total elapsed time. Click on a bar to view the Report Activity Detail.

Report Activity Detail

To access this report, in the Navigation pane select:
System Administration Reports > Database Error Summary

Then, click on a bar in the graph.

APTARE StorageConsole Report Users Guide

Monitoring Data Collection Status

The details the Data Collection Status tool can be found in the Application Administrators Guide. The following step illustrates the ability to access these reports from the Data Collection Status window.
1. From the Portal toolbar, choose Tools > Data Collection Status. 2. Expand a product folder.

Note: Currently, messages are available only for Legato NetWorker, HP Data Protector, and Capacity Manager Host Resources. Therefore, the View Messages button will not be accessible for other types of messages.

Monitoring Data Collection Status

Top Running Reports

Using this report, you can list the reports that have been running for long periods of time or that have run an excessive number of times. A report will be listed as Top Running, based on its overall cost to the system, determined by the average execution time * run count. By default, the most costly reports are listed first. Note that the average execution time includes not only the database query, but also the time associated with building the report on the Portal server. To access this report, in the Navigation pane select:
System Administration Reports > Top Running Reports

Select the time range for the list in the Report Designer.

Click the Run Count link to view Top Running Report Details.

Dashboard Considerations
A dashboard that contains four different reports (portlets) will appear in this Top Running Reports list as four separate records. This summary does not display a row for the high-level dashboard, just the reports contained within the dashboard.
If the portlet within the dashboard is a saved instance of a report, the name of the saved instance will be displayed in the Report Name column. If the portlet is not a saved instancethat is, it was simply generated and dragged into the dashboardthen Dashboard Report will be displayed in the Report Name column.

Top Running Report Details

The Run Count in the Top Running Reports Summary provides access to the list of reports that have consumed higher than average resources. Use this list to determine if any actions need to be taken. For example:
Adjust the scope of the report to narrow the content. Schedule certain top running reports to be run at off hours. Verify that automatically schedule reports are scheduled appropriately and are not running more frequently than is required. Consider scheduling frequently run reports to run once, with file system exports or emails to users.

APTARE StorageConsole Report Users Guide

Top Running Reports

Version History
To access this report, in the Navigation pane select:
System Administration Reports > Version History

The Version History report lists the installation and upgrade events so that you can determine the current version and history of StorageConsole software upgrades. This report enables you to verify that the latest patches have been installed. The Status indicates the success or failure of the installation/upgrade process. The Comments, if available, are derived from the process as well. In many cases, there wont be any specific comments related to the upgrade.

APTARE StorageConsole Report Users Guide

A \ PTARE StorageConsole Release Notes, v6.5

Chapter2

Backup Manager Management Reports

This chapter covers the following topics: Using Backup Manager Reports for Analysis Job Status Summary Job Summary Report Job Details Report Job Volume Summary Report Job Duration Report Error Log Summary Consecutive Errors By Client Largest Backup Volume Monthly Backup Summary Job Summary By Server Running and Queued Job Summary HPD Session Summary

Using Backup Manager Reports for Analysis

Management Reports offer a variety of ways to view data. Using high-level reports, you can quickly summarize your backup status and then when needed, drill down to the details. The Portal reports will quickly replace your command-line tasks that you use to cobble together event status information. These management reports can aid in troubleshooting to:
diagnose malfunctioning servers determine scheduling conflicts analyze throughput issues identify storage media degradation

The following table lists several examples of exposure analysis tasks and the reports that support your diagnostic efforts.
What to do: How to do it:

1. Determine the status of your backup jobs. What failed and how severely? Why did a job take so long? Did another job hold it up? 2. Diagnose backup scheduling issues.

Refer to Job Status Summary. Backup Manager > Management Reports > Job Status Summary Drill down to details. Backup Manager > Management Reports > Job Duration Report Backup Manager > Management Reports > Job Volume Summary From this report, you can click on a bar to drill down to details in the Job Summary report. Backup Manager > Management Reports > Error Log Summary Use the default, Group by Server option. Backup Manager > Management Reports > Consecutive Errors By Client Drilldown to investigate error conditions. Use the Consecutive Errors by Client report in conjunction with the Error Log Summary, which displays specific error code messages.

3. Diagnose server problems.

4. Diagnose client problems.

100

APTARE StorageConsole Report Users Guide

Job Status Summary

To access this report, in the Navigation pane select:
Backup Manager > Management Reports > Job Status Summary

The Job Status Summary report shows a bar chart that aggregates jobs that succeeded, failed, or produced warning messages. This high-level summary provides drilldown access to the Job Summary report, where youll find specific status messages and scheduling information. When you generate this report, several Report Designer options enable you to narrow the scope of the report and also to define how the data will be displayed. Refer to Backup Manager Primary Settings and Backup Manager Advanced Settings. In particular, note the Parent Job Only and Backup Window settings that are available for this report. Use this procedure to track down backup failure details:
1. View the Job Status Summary report. Backup Manager > Management Reports > Job Status Summary 2. Click on the top section of a bar in the bar chart to drill down to details. The top portion of the bar indicates backup error events, the middle section reports event warnings, and the bottom represents successful backups. Note that often the partial backups represent your biggest exposure, so drilling down on the warning events can help you identify and resolve issues. When you drill down to details, you are launching the Job Summary Report. 3. In the Job Summary report, view the Job Status column for backup log messages. 4. In the Job Summary report, click on the Finish Date to view the Job Details Report, which shows additional message-log entries. Be sure to scroll down to the bottom of the list to find backup attempts and notes related to the job.

Related reports:
Job Summary Report. This tabular report provides details related to the data represented in the bars shown in the Job Status Summary chart. You can drill down to the job summary details from the Job Status Summary bar chart. Backup Status SLA Report. In addition to job status, this report provides indicators showing a trend line of event successes. 1. Drillable Stacked Bar Chart 2. Pop-up Details 3. Job Failures

Job Status Summary

101

The Job Status Summary provides the following information:

Drillable Stacked Bar Chart Click on any of the bar sections to go to a Job Summary Report for the backups corresponding to the time period and event status for the bar that you selected. The top portion of each bar indicates backup error events, the middle section reports event warnings, and the bottom section represents successful backups. Mouse-over any of the bars or symbols on the chart to display pop-ups that provide details. The triangle symbol in the chart tracks to the right y-axis and provides at-a-glance backup performance statisticsspecifically, it reports the event failures as a percentage of the total events for the selected time period.

Pop-up Details

Job Failures

102

APTARE StorageConsole Report Users Guide

Job Summary Report

To access this report, in the Navigation pane select:
Backup Manager > Management Reports > Job Summary

When you generate this report, several Report Designer options enable you to narrow the scope of the report and also to define how the data will be displayed. Refer to Backup Manager Primary Settings and Backup Manager Advanced Settings. In particular, note the Parent Job Only and Backup Window settings that are available for this report. This report also can be launched from a number of other reports:
Backup Manager > Management Reports > Job Status Summary In the Job Status Summary, click a section of a bar to select the job summary by exit code: event failures, event warnings, or successful backups. Backup Manager > Management Reports > Job Duration In the Job Duration report, click on a bar for a specific time period.

In the Report Designer, use the following options to filter the output:
Event Type: All Backup & Restore Events, All Backup Events, Full Backups, Incremental Backups, Restores Event Status: All Events, Successful Events, Warning Events, Successful or Warning Events, Failed Events Client Server Product Type Start Date Finish Date Duration Written MBytes/Sec Click on a client name for a job to view/update the client server details. The management server name Vendor-specific backup software The type of backup job: full backup, incremental, archive, storage pool backup, reclamation, migration, application backup, duplication, vault, expiration, restore, or command. Date and time of the beginning of the backup job Click on this link to launch the Job Details Report. Backup job duration Amount written to the backup media Backup throughput

Job Summary Report

103

Exit Code

Indicates the job status: Successful, In Process, Partial, Failed For failed jobs, place your mouse on top of the red exit code to view the exit code details in a pop-up tool tip. The number of files written to the backup media Click on a tape link to launch a Tape Details Report.

# of Files Tapes

Note: For HP Data Protector jobs, multiple items will be reported, representing the HP Data Protector session, which is a collection of clients and their mount points. For these jobs, the finish date is derived from one of the jobs in a session.

Job Summary Advanced Options

In the Job Summary Report Designer, click Advanced to access several advanced options, as shown below.

The report time period is always in the master servers time. If you select Advanced options and change the time zone, the jobs that are returned are based on the time zone applied to the job start/finish date. The displayed dates are always in the master server time zone; just the selection of jobs that qualifies in the report time period changes.

104

APTARE StorageConsole Report Users Guide

Job Details Report

To access this report, in the Navigation pane select:
Backup Manager > Management Reports > Job Summary

Several reportsfor example, Job Summary Reportcontain a Finish Date link, which launches a Job Details report.
Note: For NetBackup and Legato NetWorker jobs, the Job Details report may include a View Files button. This option is available if the server has been configured to Capture File Details. See Capture File Details in the Application Administrators Guide. This feature should be used only for critical servers, as it may impact performance.

Job Details Report

105

In the Backup Files Navigator, use the typical click and double-click actions to expand/ collapse folders to view specific files.

Job Details The first column in the job detail provides a complete breakdown of the job. To get information about the client, management server, or media server, click on their respective links. The actual job details depend on your report. Client Click the client name to view the Server Details Report.

Node Name Displayed only for TSM jobs. Vendor Product Job ID Backup ID Job Type Job Status Job State Result Code Scheduled Start Time Actual Start Date Vendor-specific backup software. Backup job unique identifier, assigned by the backup software. Unique backup ID. One of the following: Full Backup, Incremental Backup, Restore. Reflects the success of the job: Partial, Successful, Failed. Indicates if the job actually finished running. This vendor-specific code can be used to track down troubleshooting tips in the backup vendors reference guides. The planned date and time of the jobs initiation. Date and time of the beginning of the backup job.

Date and time when the backup job ended. Actual Finish Date Duration Time zone Backup job duration. The time zone where the job ran.

106

APTARE StorageConsole Report Users Guide

Backup Details

The second column of this report provides server particulars. Server Total Capacity # of Tapes # of Files Tape IDs Storage Unit File List Click the Server name to launch the Server Details Report. Servers capacity in MB. Number of tapes used by this backup job. Number of files backed up by this job. Which tapes were used by the job. Physical device name. Directory path of the file list location.

Policy and Schedule Details

Click on the policy or schedule name to go to the policy/schedule detail page, which provides even more details about the policy and schedule that governs the job. Policy Name Policy Type Policy Domain Schedule Schedule Type Compressed/ Encrypted Indicates how the backup data was treated. Click the policy name to launch the Policy Details screen. Assigned by the System Administrator. Displayed only for TSM jobs. Click the schedule name to launch the Policy Details screen.

Paths and Related Jobs Backup Image Job Attempts

The paths being backed up for the job are displayed in a comma-delimited list. When there are multiple related jobs, each of the jobs and associated paths is displayed in the related jobs listing. Clicking on any of the related job IDs will take you to the Job Details report. Click on the Media Name to access additional details in the Tape Details report. When there are re-try attempts for any given job, each attempt will be listed in the attempts section at the bottom of the Job Detail. Each attempt row displays details of that attempt, including but not limited to, the backup ID, backup status, started writing date, finished writing date, and transfer rate.

Job Details Report

107

Adding a Note to a Job

As you view the Job Details report, you can add a note that will remain attached to the job. The note automatically supplies your email address and the date the note was added. You supply a message. This feature offers an essential audit trail capability to ensure Sarbanes-Oxley compliance. To add a note to a job:
1. Launch the Job Details report from the Job Summary report. Backup Manager > Administration Reports > Job Summary 2. In the Job Summary report, click a Finish Date link to display the Job Details report. 3. In the Job Details report, right-click and then select Add a Note. In a similar fashion, you can clear all notes. Tip: When you add a note to a job or clear all notes, youll need to refresh the Job Detail page so that you can view the results of your action.

108

APTARE StorageConsole Report Users Guide

Job Volume Summary Report

To access this report, in the Navigation pane select:
Backup Manager > Management Reports > Job Volume Summary

The Job Volume Summary report shows the number of files and amount of data (in KB) that you backed up for a specified time period. While the Job Status Summary report approaches the data from an event status point of view, the Job Volume Summary report presents data from the perspective of how much has been backed up, with a focus on determining if your scheduling is balanced. The true value of this high-level report is its ease of use. At a glanceand with a few mouse clicksyou can ascertain problematic time periods, consumption trends, and scheduling peaks. Use this procedure to analyze volume usage trends:
1. View the Job Volume Summary report. Backup Manager > Management Reports > Job Volume Summary 2. Mouse-over a triangle at the top of a bar that indicates a peak usage period. A pop-up displays the number of files that were backed up for that period. 3. Click anywhere on the bar to launch the Job Summary Report. In the Job Summary report, pay attention to the data in the following columns: Duration, Written, MBytes/Sec, Exit Code and Job Status. This data gives you an idea of which jobs have over-tasked your storage. Remember that you can sort the report columns to group jobs that took the longest or that failed. 1. Drillable Bar Chart 2. Pop-up Details 3. Backup Volume 4. Backup Files

The Job Volume Summary report provides the following information:

Drillable Bar Chart Pop-up Details Click on any of the bars to go to a Job Summary Report page for the backups that correspond to the time period of the bar that you selected. Mouse-over any of the bars or symbols on the chart to display pop-ups that provide details. Bar: Displays the volume of data backed up for the associated time period. Triangle symbol: Displays the total number of files backed up. Lists the amount of data backed up. Lists the # of files backed up.

Backup Volume Backup Files

Job Volume Summary Report

109

Job Duration Report

To access this report, in the Navigation pane select:
Backup Manager > Management Reports > Job Duration

The Job Duration report combines into one view, information about both backup and restore duration. If, on a specific day, there were two backup events that completed after 1 hour and 3 hours respectively, and one restore completed after .5 hours, the bar reports a duration of 4.5 hours. You can also report on a single event type:
All Backup Events Full Backups Incremental Backups Restores 1. Drillable Bars in Chart 2. Pop-up Details 3. Duration

The Job Duration report provides the following information:

Drillable Bars in Chart Pop-up Details Click on any of the bar sections to go to a Job Summary Report for all corresponding events. Mouse-over any of the bars or symbols on the chart to display pop-ups that provide details. This pop-up lists the total duration for the selected time period. The total amount of time the backup and restore events took to complete. If on a specific day there were two backup events that completed after 1hr and 3hrs respectively, and one restore completed after .5 hours, the bar reports a duration of 4.5 hours.

Duration

Use this report as a starting point to determine why certain days show excessive backup durations. To diagnose excessive backup durations:
1. View the Job Duration bar chart, looking for excessive duration times.

110

APTARE StorageConsole Report Users Guide

2. Click on the bar for a troublesome day to launch the Job Summary Report. 3. In the Job Summary Report, click on the Duration column header to sort the data by Duration. Now youll see excessive client usage at the top of the list. You might also sort by MBytes/Sec to identify throughput issues. 4. In the Job Summary Report, click on the Finish Date of a suspect job to display the Job Details Report.

By using a combination of reports, you can figure out if some jobs held up others, if there are server problems that require your attention, or if consecutive errors are symptomatic of storage device failure or media degradation.

Job Duration Report

111

Error Log Summary

To access this report, in the Navigation pane select:
Backup Manager > Management Reports > Error Log Summary

The Error Log Summary reports backup failure details that have been gleaned from backup error logs. Use this report in conjunction with the Consecutive Errors By Client report to mitigate future problems by determining which types of errors occurred with the greatest frequency. You can customize this summary to report by a specific group:
Server (the default) Client Policy

In each of the group views, the Error Code Description typically provides sufficient details to start your troubleshooting process. Refer to the backup products reference guides for additional guidance.
Note: Click on any of the column headings to sort the table by column. Note:

This report displays a number of links that enable drilldown access to additional details, as described in the following table. The Error Log Summary provides the following information:
Note: Some of the following fields do not appear in every Error Log Summary. Each of the three report typesClient, Server, Policycontains only the fields that make sense for its group. Server Client IP Address Policy The server is the system that is managing the storage devices. The system that was backed up. The IP address of the client, shown only in the Error Log Summary By Client report. If you selected Group By Policy through the Report Designer, the policy name appears in this column. This column does not appear if you selected Group By Management Server.

112

APTARE StorageConsole Report Users Guide

Backup Product

Indicates the backup software running on the server where the error occurred. Refer to that products documentation to correlate the error code to diagnose problems. HP Data Protector Legato Networker Symantec Backup Exec NetBackup Tivoli Storage Manager Numeric code reported by the backup product. Refer to the backup products reference guides for troubleshooting advice. Each row in the table displays the number of occurrences for each error code within the reports selected time frame. Click on any error occurrence to go to the Job Summary report, which lists the events that correspond to that particular error code. Click on the Last Error Date to go to the Job Summary report, which displays the most recent error events only, including skipped files. Each row in the table includes a detailed error description that provides you with valuable information. Since the data is derived from backup job error logs, this description is backup-product dependent.

Error Code Error Occurrences

Last Error Date Error Code Description

Error Log Summary

113

Consecutive Errors By Client

To access this report, in the Navigation pane select:
Backup Manager > Management Reports> Consecutive Errors by Client

Use this report to proactively manage clients and servers. Consecutive errors may portend hardware reliability issues. Using this report you can identify not only consecutive errors, but also the number of consecutive days that the errors persisted. The default order for this listing is descending order, with the clients having the most consecutive errors listed first. Correlate the number of consecutive errors with the number of consecutive days so that you can disregard errors that appear to be intermittent.
Note: Click on any of the column headings to sort the table by column. Note:

The Consecutive Errors by Client report provides the following information:

Client Name IP Address Server Name The client is the system that is being backed up. Clients IP address on the LAN. The server is the system that is managing the storage devices. Click on any server name to link to the Server Details page, which provides you comprehensive information about that server. Then, from the Server Details page, click on the Server Group link to determine the server groups to which this server belongs. # of consecutive errors logged within the designated time frame. Click on the number to launch the related Job Summary report where youll find a detailed listed of the errors.

# of Consecutive Errors

114

APTARE StorageConsole Report Users Guide

# of Consecutive Days First/Last Error Dates

# of days in which the clients consecutive errors were logged. Date of the first and last errors, within the specified time frame, gleaned from logs. The range between the first and last error dates gives some insight into the severity of the problem. Click on each of the error dates to generate two separate Job Summary reports so that you can compare the snapshots of the start and end of the error events.

Consecutive Errors By Client

115

Largest Backup Volume

To access this report, in the Navigation pane select:
Backup Manager > Management Reports > Largest Backup Volume

Use this report to identify consumers of your most utilized backup volume. A pie chart graphically represents the usage that also is listed in the legend. This report will help you identify greedy servers or applications. Click the server links in the legend to drill down to details.

The Largest Backup Volume is a real-time snapshot of the largest server backup consumers within the report scope.
Hold your mouse over any of the pie chart sections a pop-up will display pertinent server consumption details. Click on any section of the pie chart to view the Server Consumption Summary report for that particular server.

116

APTARE StorageConsole Report Users Guide

Monthly Backup Summary

To access this report, in the Navigation pane select:
Backup Manager > Management Reports > Monthly Backup Summary or Backup Manager > Administration Reports > Data Protection Dashboard

Server Details Last Backup Details

Clicking the server name will point you to the Server Details screen which provides detailed information regarding the server including but not limited to: IP Address, ID Number, Make, Model, OS, and Server Group Membership. The Monthly Backup Summary provides you with the date and time of the most recent backup event for each server in their chosen server group. Clicking on the link will take you to the Event Detail screen where you can view backup details: Event Type Exit Status The code provided by the backup solution determines this status.

The description associated with the backup solutions exit code. Status Description # of Tapes Tape ID #s # of Files Complete Error Log Last Full Backup Details Number of tapes used for the job. Numeric ID of the tapes used. Number of files backed up. An error log appears only if errors occurred.

The Monthly Backup Summary provides you with the date and time of the most recent full backup event for each server in the chosen server group. Clicking on the link will take you to the Event Detail screen where you can view backup details regarding the full backup, including but not limited to: Event Type, Exit Status, Status Description, # of Tapes, Tape ID #s, # of Files, and Complete Error Log (if errors occurred).

Monthly Backup Summary

117

Job Summary By Server

To access this report, in the Navigation pane select:
Backup Manager > Management Reports > Job Summary By Server

This report displays the number of jobs and their status, for jobs started during the time period that you specified for the report.
Note: Only NetBackup and Legato jobs are supported for this report. Also, the report requires a homogeneous server scopethat is, choose either all NetBackup servers or all Legato servers in your scope selection.

Correlate the data in this report with the information in the Real Time Library and Drive Status to determine if there are problems with the server. For example, if the Job Summary By Server shows jobs in the queue and the Real Time Library and Drive Status shows available drives, something is preventing the queued jobs from getting to running status.

Note: The report for Legato servers is titled, Real Time Save Set Summary. Server Run The backup management server. Jobs that are currently running and have been assigned to a storage unit. this value is the total current running jobs and is not constrained by the selected report time period scope. Jobs that are queued for an available storage unit. This value is the total currently queued jobs and it is not constrained by the selected report time period scope. Jobs that completed successfully on their first try. Jobs that completed successfully after two or more attempts. Jobs that completed, but were partial jobs with one or more warnings. Jobs that completed, but a fatal error occurred. Each numeric column is totalled at the bottom of the table.

Que

1st 2+ Warnings Errors Total

118

APTARE StorageConsole Report Users Guide

Running and Queued Job Summary

To access this report, in the Navigation pane select:
Backup Manager > Management Reports > Running and Queued Job Summary Note: Only NetBackup and Legato NetWorker jobs are supported for this report. Also, the report requires a homogeneous server scopethat is, choose either all NetBackup servers or all Legato servers in your server group scope selection. For Legato NetWorker, this report is titled, Running Save Sets Summary.

The Running and Queued Jobs Summary displays any job that was running or queued at the time the management servers were polled. Jobs that require attention (long-running, stalled, or slow jobs) will be highlighted in red and moved to the top of the running and queued jobs list so that they are quickly noted by administrators and handled appropriately. Each of these flagged jobs will be accompanied by one or more icons to indicate the type of potential problem.
clock - indicates a long running job (>= 12 hours). arrow / barrier - indicates a stalled job (no write activity for >= 15 minutes) snail - indicates and slow running job (kilobytes per second throughput <= 200 Kb/sec) Server Client Policy Name Job ID Try (MB) Try Start Date Duration KB/Sec Last Written Indicators Enables drill down access to the server details Drill down to Client details The name of the backup policy associated with the job If applicable, the NetBackup job ID Amount of data attempting to be backed up Date of the attempted backup The length of the backup job Transfer rate The date and time of the last write. clock - indicates a long running job (>= 12 hours). arrow / barrier - indicates a stalled job (no write activity for >= 15 minutes) snail - indicates and slow running job (kilobytes per second throughput <= 200 Kb/sec)

Running and Queued Job Summary

119

HPD Session Summary

To access this report, in the Navigation pane select:
Backup Manager > Management Reports > HPD Session Summary

The Session Summary reports provides an overview of the HP Data Protector backup/ restore sessions.

Session Name Event Type Backup Type Specification Start Time End Time Success Percentage MB Status Tapes

Backup/restore session name unknown, backup, restore incremental, differential, transaction, full, or delta Name of the HP Data Protector backup specification Backup/restore start time Backup/restore end time % of backup/restore session that was successful Amount of data backed up Session Status: unknown, completed, completed/failures, or failed The tapes used for the backup/restore session

120

APTARE StorageConsole Report Users Guide

APTARE StorageConsole Release Notes, v6.5

Chapter2

Backup Administration Reports

This chapter covers the following topics: Operations Dashboard Command Center Dashboard Data Protection Dashboard Message of the Day Report Server Details Report Server Group Mission Control Report Client Protection Summary TSM Storage Pools Dashboard Client Job Histogram

121

Operations Dashboard
To access this report, in the Navigation pane select:
Backup Manager > Administration Reports > Operations Dashboard

The Operations Dashboard provides you with multiple views of your backup environment on a single page.
1. Job Status Summary 2. Current Media Summary 3. Largest Backup Volume Report 4. Storage Unit Status

Job Status Summary

Displays the number of successful, warning and error events for each time period. The dashed yellow line displays the SLA success goal while the triangle symbols track actual achievement for each day. Clicking on any of the bars will take you to the Job Summary Report for the corresponding event status and time frame. Provides a real-time snapshot of all the media utilized by the servers within the report scope. Mouse-over any of the pie-chart sections to display pop-ups that provide pertinent details about the media of the corresponding status. Click on any section of the pie-chart or the to go to the Tape Media Summary report for all media with the corresponding status. Click on the Total Tape Media link to go to the Tape Media Summary report for all the servers within the report scope.

Current Media Summary

122

APTARE StorageConsole Report Users Guide

Largest Backup Volume Report

Provides a real-time snapshot of the largest server backup consumers within the report scope. Mouse-over any of the bars or symbols on the chart to display pop-ups that provide details. Click on any section of the pie-chart to go to the Server Consumption Summary Report for a particular server. Click on the Total Servers link to go to the Server Consumption Summary report for all the servers within the report scope.

Storage Unit Status

Each file system is identified by the file system path, with its management server displayed above the file system graphic. The total number of Storage Units sharing the same file system is also shown. The display of this report is dependent on the backup products in your environment and the report scope. Each file system is accompanied by a thermometer, which indicates the percentage of space occupied and available on the file system. The Used value is as reported by the operating system, and includes space occupied by all backup images as well as any other files that may reside on that file system. The Free value also is reported by the operating system. Used and free values of Unknown indicate the Discovery module has not been configured to probe the media servers file systems for their physical characteristics.

Operations Dashboard

123

Command Center Dashboard

To access this report, in the Navigation pane select:
Backup Manager > Administration Reports > Command Center Dashboard

The Command Center Dashboard provides four portlets with a real-time view of your backup environment.
Note: Only NetBackup and Legato jobs are supported for this dashboard. Also, the dashboard requires a homogeneous server scopethat is, choose either all NetBackup servers or all Legato servers in your scope selection.

Real Time Job Summary

Displays the number of jobs and the job status for the time period that you selected in the report scope: Run (Running) Que (Queued) 1st (1st Attempt) 2+ (2 or More Attempts) Wrn (Warnings) Err (Error) Currently running jobs that have been assigned to a storage unit. Jobs that are queued and waiting for an available storage unit. Jobs that completed successfully on the first try. Jobs that completed successfully after two or more attempts. Completed, but there were partial jobs with one or more warnings. Completed, but a fatal error occurred.

You can drill down on any non-zero value to view the Job Summary Report for those corresponding jobs. Additionally, you can drill down further to the more comprehensive Job Detail Report for any individual jobs listed in the summary. Real Time Library and Drive Status

Summarizes each tape library in your environment. The data will only be as current as the time of the most recent poll of your management server(s) by the Data Collector. Monitor the health of each library by tracking the number of drives up, down, in use and available within each tape library. When the number of down drives in a library is equal to or greater than 25%, the text for the librarys row is flagged in red.

124

APTARE StorageConsole Report Users Guide

Real Time Storage Unit Utilization

The Real Time Storage Unit Component displays current high-level information for each storage unit in your environment. Each storage unit listed provides you with several columns of pertinent information. Storage Unit Media Server Type Total Drives

The name of the unit. Click this link to display the Server Details Report. The type of unit, such as Disk, Disk Staging, Media Manager, or NDMP (Network Data Management Protocol).

The units configuration. Jobs Run Jobs that are currently running and have been assigned to a storage unit. This value is the total current running jobs and is not constrained by the selected report time period scope. Max Drives Notes the maximum drives per job. Max Multiplex/ The maximum number of concurrent drives.
Drives The Drives Up column combined with the Jobs Queued and Jobs Running columns help you determine whether a storage unit is functioning properly. For instance, if there are jobs in the queue for a storage unit, and there are also drives available within a storage unit, there may be something preventing the queued jobs from moving to the running status. Running and Queued Jobs Summary Displays any job that was running or queued at the time the Data Collector last polled the management server(s). Click any Job ID # in the list to retrieve comprehensive detail about a specific job. The total number of running jobs displayed on the dashboard is limited. If the number of running and queued jobs exceeds the limit, all the running and queued jobs can be viewed in a separate report by clicking the Total Running and Queued Jobs link. The following jobs require attention, so the report highlights them in red and moves them to the top of the running and queued jobs list. Each of these flagged jobs will be accompanied by one or more icons to indicate the potential problem:

Clock Arrow/ barrier Snail

Long Slow Stalled

>= 12 hours <= 200 Kb/sec No write activity for >= 15 minutes

Long Slow Stalled

12 hours <200 kilobytes per second 1800 seconds (30 mins)

Command Center Dashboard

125

Data Protection Dashboard

To access this dashboard, in the Navigation pane select:
Backup Manager > Administration Reports > Data Protection Dashboard

The Data Protection Dashboard contains the following reports:

Message of the Day Report Job Status Summary Mission Control Report Monthly Backup Summary

In the Data Protection Dashboard Report Designer, in addition to specifying a time period, you also can choose to omit backup retries.

126

APTARE StorageConsole Report Users Guide

Message of the Day Report

To access this report, in the Navigation pane select:
Backup Manager > Administration Reports > Data Protection Dashboard

This report provides a starting point for handling issues that require immediate attention. Specifically, it lists the failed backups and restores per server. From these lists, you can drill down to the Server Details Report, the Job Summary Report, and the Mission Control Report.

Drill down for additional details: 1. To access the Server Details Report, click a link under the Server column. 2. To access Job Summary reports, click a Finish Date link.

Message of the Day Report

127

Server Details Report

This report can be accessed from numerous reports via either Client or Server name links:
Job Summary Report Consecutive Errors by Client Disk Usage and Performance Billing and Chargeback Summary Server Group listings

Click the server name to go to the Server Details screen for additional information.
Note: The output is specific to the server type, as shown in the following examples.

Host Aliases
Some servers also may show a list of host aliases in this Server Details report:

128

APTARE StorageConsole Report Users Guide

Edit Server Details

IP Address Location Make Model OS

The servers IP address Server location, as supplied by the System Administrator Vendor name, such as IBM or Sun The products alphanumeric identifier The specific version of the operating system, such as Solaris 9

Server Details Report

129

Server Group Membership

Click a group link to access the Server Group listing. The filespace section at the bottom of this report provides the following data (for TSM only): Node Filespace Capacity Free Volumes: Click links to access specific volumes. Storage Pool

Filespaces

130

APTARE StorageConsole Report Users Guide

Server Group
This report can be accessed from the Server Details Report. In the Server Details Report, click a Group Member link to list the clients/servers belonging to that server group.

The Server Group table provides the following information. Note that the columns that are shown may vary, depending on the type of server group:

Client Server Last Backup Backups this month Product Type Written this Month Node Capacity

Link to the Server Details Report. Link to the Server Details Report for the backup server. Link to the Job Summary Report. The number of the clients backups for the month. The backup software that performed the backups. Number of GB/TB backed up. For TSM servers, the node name The servers capacity, if it can be determined. In the case of backup clients, the capacity may be unknown to StorageConsole.

Server Group

131

Mission Control Report

To access this report, in the Navigation pane select:
Backup Manager > Administration Reports > Data Protection Dashboard

or
Backup Manager > Administration Reports > Mission Control

The Mission Control report provides you with a comprehensive snapshot of your backup and restore event status. Using this report, you can easily identify servers that have had no backups or failed backups. And, you can drilldown to ascertain the root cause of unsuccessful backups. Organizations use this report to ensure Sarbanes-Oxley compliance, as it shows ultimate backup success over time. When you generate this report, the Report Designer prompts you to select scope parameters, including the options to Ignore Retries and also to Exclude Clients with Successful Backups. If the Exclude Clients with Successful Backups checkbox was checked in the Report Designer, only clients with at least one No Jobs or Failed indicator will be shown. Note that if the last column corresponds to the current day and the indicator is No Jobs and all other indicators for the row are successful, the row will be considered a success and therefore will be excluded from the report.

132

APTARE StorageConsole Report Users Guide

1. Event Status 2. Current Date Range 3. Status Indicators

Note: A row can be expanded to list underlying details for NetBackup, Legato, and HP Data Protector servers. For Tivoli Storage Manager and Backup Exec, an expansion arrow will not be available. Also, the Flashback policy type (used for VM backups) is not supported; however, an expansion arrow may be displayed, with no underlying details available. Event Status Displays a row for each server within the report scope. Click on any server name in the list to go to the Server Details page for that server. Some servers will have an arrow next to it, which can be used to expand the server to show the underlying file systems. The date range that is currently displayed in the report is always listed at the top of the report. If the date range is beyond the current day, or before your backup environment data started being pushed to the Reporting Database, the event indicator will be No Jobs.

Current Date Range

Mission Control Report

133

Status Indicators Each day column for every server contains an event status indicator with the following color codes. The indicator always reflects the most serious status if there is more than one event for that server on that day. For example, if there are three successful events and one failure, the indicator will be red. Blue Yellow Red Successful events Warning events Failed events

Click on any of the indicators to go to the Job Summary Report for all events associated with that server on that day. Once in the Job Summary Report, you can drilldown to Job Details and even add a note to indicate the strategy for resolving an issuethus, providing an audit trail.

Tailoring the Report Output by Backup Product

In the Report Designer, click Advanced.

134

APTARE StorageConsole Report Users Guide

Client Protection Summary

To access this report, in the Navigation pane select:
Backup Manager > Administration Reports > Client Protection Summary Note: The Client Protection Summary is available only if you have purchased the optional addon Discovery module. Therefore, this report is NetBackup-specific.

With the Discovery module, you can use the Client Protection Report Designer to customize and personalize a Client Protection Summary that will identify exposure and threats to an enterprise data protection environment.

The Client Protection Report provides a single-pane view of the protection status for the list of clients or servers. This is a tabular report with the following columns:

Client Protection Summary

135

Clients and Lists all clients and devices in the scope of the report along with their key File attributes: Systems The name of the client or device as returned by the backup software or a dns lookup of the IP address. If the name is not returned by DNS, the report displays the IP address. Click on the client to view the Client Details. Note: If the discovery process is unable to resolve the name of a client, the IP address will be displayed. To prevent unresolved clients from appearing in the report, clear the Show unresolved hosts check box in the Report Designer. The operating system type returned by the discovery process. Currently, only NetBackup is detected. Drives or file systems uncovered by the discovery processfor example, C:\, /export, and /.

Client Name

OS Type Backup Product Device

Coverage Level

Lists all clients and devices in the scope of the report along with their key attributes:
The client is completely protectedthat is, an active policy exists that references the complete drive or file system as an include path. For example, the file system /home is referenced as an include path in the policy Unix_servers_home. No active policies exist that reference the complete drive or file system. However, one or more active policies exist that reference a subset of the drive or file system as an include path. For example, for the file system /home, the include path /home/fred is referenced in an active policy. There are no active policies that reference either the entire or any subset of the drive or file system. The coverage level is unknown. Typically, this level is displayed if NetBackup is not detected on the client.

Full

Partial

None Unknown

136

APTARE StorageConsole Report Users Guide

Protection Status

Lists protection status for each of the drives or file systems:

Successful full backup for the device or file system occurred within the report period and one or more active policies provide FULL coverage as defined above. Successful full backup for the device or file system occurred within the report period, but the active policies only provide PARTIAL coverage. No successful full backup for the device or file system occurred within the report period. Coverage level is irrelevant. The protection status and coverage level is unknown. Typically this status is displayed if NetBackup is not detected on the client.

Blue

Yellow Red White

Last Backups Policies Exclude Flag

Lists the date and time of the last successful and last attempted FULL backups for the drive or file system. Displays the backup policy name, if the drive or file system contains one or more policies. Click on an individual policy to view the policy details. Enables you to exclude specific clients or devices from the report: select the Exclude check box and click Update Settings. The selected client(s) no longer appear in subsequent reports. To subsequently include clients in or exclude clients from the report, select the Show Excluded Clients check box from the Report Designer.

Client Protection Summary

137

TSM Storage Pools Dashboard

To access this report, in the Navigation pane select:
Backup Manager > Administration Reports > TSM Storage Pools Dashboard

The TSM Storage Pools Dashboard provides a real-time view into capacity and process status information for the selected list of TSM Storage Pools. In a single pane, you quickly can analyze capacity and process status information for each of the Storage Pools.
Storage Pool Capacity The pie chart displays the percentage and GBytes used and available for the Storage Pool. The GBytes Used is calculated by multiplying the percentage used times the the estimated capacity of the Storage Pool.

138

APTARE StorageConsole Report Users Guide

Storage Pool Attributes

This section displays the list of storage pool attributes:

Server Type Device Type Access Type Reclaim Threshold Backup Server name Primary, Copy Sequential, Random Read/Write, Read only TSM can reclaim volumes that exceed a reclamation thresholdthat is, a percentage of unused space on the volume. This threshold value is set by the TSM administrator, within TSM.

The storage pool that is next in line for backups when the current pool reaches capacitythat is, the destination storage Next Storage Pool pool for migrated data. TSM automatically requests a storage pool when needed. The maximum amount of scratch space allocated to the storage pool. When the number of scratch volumes that TSM is using for the storage pool exceeds the maximum number of scratch volumes specified, the storage pool can run out of space. Storage pool capacity Percentage used Estimated percentage of storage that can be migrated The value used by TSM to start/stop migration. This percentage indicates when the server should stop migrating files to the next available storage pool. The value used by TSM to start/stop migration. This percentage indicates when the server should start migrating files to the next available storage pool. The maximum size of the storage pool.

Max Scratch

Capacity (GB) % Utilized % Migrated Low Mig %

High Mig % Max Size (MB) Storage Pool Utilization

This is a historical tracking bar chart that displays the history of used and available capacity for the selected storage pool.

Tape Occupancy This pie chart displays a summary of the GBytes and number of tapes used by each Summary client/server that occupy this Storage Pool. The chart displays the top eight tape media consumers of this Storage Pool. Click on any of the client/server names to view detailed tape media consumption information.

TSM Storage Pools Dashboard

139

Tape Media Summary

This pie chart shows a summary of all the tapes assigned to this Storage Pool. This pie chart displays both the percentage of tapes grouped by media status, and the number of tapes grouped by media status: Filling Full Pending Empty This historical tracking bar chart displays the summary status of any TSM process that used this Storage Pool. Examples of TSM processes that are plotted on this bar chart are: Storage Pool Backups, Migrations, Expirations, etc. The legend at the bottom of the chart describes the plotted process status values. Click on a bar in this graph to view the TSM Process Summary.

Storage Pool Process History

TSM Process Summary

This report is accessed from the TSM Storage Pool Dashboard, by clicking a bar in a Storage Pool Process History graph.

This report provides indicators of the type of job, as well as, the number of files and the relevant tape IDs.

140

APTARE StorageConsole Report Users Guide

Client Job Histogram

To access this report, in the Navigation pane select:
Backup Manager > Administration Reports > Client Job Histogram

From the Client Job Histogram Report Designer, you can select one of the following options:
Job Throughput Histogram Job Activity Histogram

These reports provide hour-by-hour data for the previous 24-hour period. Using these reports, you can identify bottlenecks and adjust your environment accordingly.

Job Throughput Histogram

This report provides colored visual cues for quickly determining the backup throughput trends for clients that had backup jobs within the previous 24 hours. This report shows completed jobs that started within the selected time period. These jobs could have a completion status of either successful or warning.
Red - Indicates below average throughputless than 5 MB/second Yellow - Indicates average throughputgreater than 5 MB/second and less than 9 MB/ second Blue - Indicates above average throughputgreater than 9 MB/second Note: The breakdown is based on the average, not the mean throughput.

Client Job Histogram

141

Job Activity Histogram

The Job Activity Histogram lists clients that had backup jobs within the previous 24 hours. The colored cells enable you to quickly determine the activity per client. The report shows the number of completed jobs that started within the selected time period. These jobs could have a completion status of: successful, failed, or warning.

142

APTARE StorageConsole Report Users Guide

APTARE StorageConsole Release Notes, v6.5

Chapter2

Media Management Reports

APTARE StorageConsole Release Notes, v6.5 This chapter covers the following topics: Current Media Summary Tape Media Summary Report

Using Media Management Reports

The reports in this menu group enable you to manage your backup media inventory. Use the Current Media Summary for an at-a-glance view of the status of the media associated with each of your backup solutions. The pie charts and legends in this report provide drilldown access to the Tape Media Summary report.

Using Media Management Reports

143

Current Media Summary

To access this report, in the Navigation pane select:
Backup Manager > Media Management Reports > Current Media Summary Note: This report does not display Backup Exec media data.

The Current Media Summary is a real-time snapshot of all the media utilized by the backup solutions for servers within the scope of the report. The status types vary for each pie chart because they are directly related to the specific backup solution. So, for example, NetBackup reports expired tapes, while NetWorker indicates which tapes can be recycled. Refer to the backup solutions reference guides for details about media status types.
Hold your mouse over any of the pie chart sections and a pop-up will display details about the media of the corresponding status. Similar information is reflected in the chart legend. Click on any section of the pie chart and/or legend labels to view the Tape Media Summary report. Click on the Total Tape Media link to view the Tape Media Summary report.

144

APTARE StorageConsole Report Users Guide

Tape Media Summary Report

To access this report, in the Navigation pane select:
Backup Manager > Media Management Reports > Tape Media Summary

You also can access this report from the Operations Dashboard by clicking on the Total Tape Media link in the Current Media Summary.
Note: This report does not display Backup Exec media data.

Depending on your environment, this report listing can get rather long, so you may want to narrow the reports scope. When you generate the report, you can limit the output using the following parameter choices:
Scope: Select specific servers and/or server groups Event Status: Select All Media, Media Inside Tape Library, or Media Outside Tape Library Media Status: All, Expired, Available, In Use, or Full

Sortable Column Headings Tape Media Details Tape Mgmt Server Details Capacity Details

When your Tape Media Summary report contains multiple listings, the sortable headings enable you to find the tape media you want quickly. Click on any of the table headings to sort the table by that heading in ascending order. Click the heading a second time to sort in descending order. Each Media ID is a link that will take you to the Tape Media Detail page, which provides comprehensive information about the tape media including, but not limited to, a listing of all backup events associated with the tape media. Each Tape Media ID in the report includes a link to its Management Server Detail page.

Estimated Capacity - see Tape Media Detail Report MBytes displays the used capacity Available (MB) Percentage Available

Status

The tape media status is reported as: Cleaning, Filling, Full, Unavailable, or Vendor Specific (which indicates the disposition specific to the backup product). Note: Place your mouse pointer on top of Vendor Specific to view the message.

Tape Media Summary Report

145

Tape Media Detail Report

The Tape Media Detail can be accessed from the Tape Media Summary Report by clicking on the Media ID.

Tape Media Location Details Capacity and Usage Details Tape Media Event Details Sortable Backup Events Listing

This column of name value pairs indicates the location of the tape media (library name or group of tapes outside the library), the volume group and pool names, and slot number (if inside library). The Library name links to the Media Summary report with all the media in the library listed. The capacity and usage column provides you with the % and MByte total capacity, usage, and available. The MBytes available value is color coded. It will be red if % available is less than 25%, yellow if less than 50%, and green if 50% or more. See Estimated Capacity Notes. This column provides you with the date and time of tape media expiration, creation, date assigned, last mount, and last read. The origination time zone for all the date and time values is provided at the bottom of the column. At the bottom of the page, a complete listing of every backup that was made to the tape media is provided. Click on any backup ID to view the Backup Event Detail for that event. Click on the server name to view the client server details page.

146

APTARE StorageConsole Report Users Guide

Tape Details
You can access this report from the Tape Media Summary Report by clicking on the Media ID.

Tape Media Location Details Capacity and Usage Details Tape Media Event Details Sortable Backup Events Listing

This column of name value pairs indicates the location of the tape media (library name or group of tapes outside the library), the volume group and pool names, and slot number (if inside library). The Library name links to the Media Summary Report with all the media in the library listed. The capacity and usage column provides you with the % and MByte total capacity, usage, and available. The MBytes available value is color coded. It will be red if % available is less than 25%, yellow if less than 50%, and green if 50% or more. This column provides you with the date and time of tape media expiration, creation, date assigned, last mount, and last read. The origination time zone for all the date and time values is provided at the bottom of the column. At the bottom of the page, a complete listing of every backup that was made to the tape media is provided. Click on any backup ID to view the Backup Event Detail for that event. Click on the server name to view the client server details page.

Estimated Capacity Notes

Every time tape data is captured, StorageConsole recalculates the estimated tape capacity for the tape media type and volume pool combination. It takes into consideration the written KBs for the media type and volume pool for full tapes and then stores the average as the estimated tape capacity. Initially, when there is not enough data captured, this value may look low compared to the capacity stated by the vendor. Over time, the estimated capacity improves to the actual number of KBs that is being written to the tapes. Note that the amount of data that fits on the tapes differs based on the compression algorithm used and the type of data that is being backed up, which results in different compression ratios.

Tape Details

147

For NetBackup, some environments freeze or suspend their media and do not allow their tapes to fill to capacity. In this situation, a StorageConsole database table can be updated to override the standard estimated capacity calculation with values for Volume Pool ID, Media Type, and Estimated Capacity. When values are supplied in this table, the NetBackup estimated capacity calculations will first determine the average size of full tapesby tape type and volume pool. If this value is less than the value provided in the table, the value in the table will be used for the estimated capacity. Refer to the System Administrators Guide for details.

148

APTARE StorageConsole Report Users Guide

APTARE StorageConsole Release Notes, v6.5

10
Chapter2

Backup SLA Reports

This chapter covers the following topics: Available SLA Reports

Backup Start Time Performance

Backup Start Time SLA Report Determining and Improving Backup Start Time Performance

Backup Success Performance

Backup Status SLA Report Determining and Improving Backup Success Performance

Backup Duration Performance

Backup Duration SLA Report Determining and Improving Backup Duration Performance

149

Available SLA Reports

Whether youre an Administrator in an IT department or an Administrator at a Data Center, you commit a specific level of service to your end-users or customers. Use default SLA reports or create custom reports to provide information that determines if you are satisfying the commitments you made to your users or customers. With access to the Reporting Database, you can configure the metrics upon which the reports are based. Service Level Agreements (SLAs) are typically based on the following metrics:
Backup Start Time Performance Backup Success Performance Backup Duration Performance

The reports can provide data to fine-tune your SLA and to determine if youre meeting your commitments. The more detailed your SLAs, the easier it is to cut costs, in the case of an IT department, or provide competitive SLA pricing, in the case of Data Centers.
Refer to the following SLA reports: Backup Start Time Backup Status Backup Duration

150

APTARE StorageConsole Report Users Guide

Backup Start Time SLA Report

To access this report, in the Navigation pane select:
Backup Manager > SLA Reports > Backup Start Time SLA

The Backup Start Time SLA report displays the total number of backups that began within a specific time range of their scheduled start time.
Note: This report can be used only for NetBackup, Backup Exec, and TSM start time SLAs.

Use this report to determine what proportion of backups started at their scheduled time, or were delayed and by how long. If jobs are consistently missing their targeted start times, you may need to investigate the feasibility of your current schedule. A delay could be the result of other jobs taking too long or possibly because there are no drives available. To anticipate delays as a result of drive availability, consider using the Backup Manager Forecasting Reports on page 175. To determine and improve backup start time performance, see Determining and Improving Backup Start Time Performance.

Backup Start Time SLA Report

151

Determining and Improving Backup Start Time Performance

Use the Backup Start Time SLA report to gauge your backup efficiency. The Backup Start Time SLA report consists of a bar chart that provides a visual indicator of how long backups take to complete. Backup completion time is measured in days. After you use this chart to identify the backups that represent poor performance, you can drill down to determine the causes so that you can prevent inefficiencies in the future. Your SLA determines what values represent poor performance vs. excellent performance. However, if you dont currently have an SLA implemented, strive for Good (31-60 minutes) performance by improving backup jobs with Average to Poor performance. To determine and improve backup start time performance:
1. Go to the Backup Start Time SLA Report. 2. For each day, observe the number of backups in the bar graphs y-axis or hold your cursor over the color-coded segments to display the number of backups. Each segment represents 100% of the overall jobs for the day. Each bar represents a specific day. If no bar appears for a specific day, then either no backup jobs ran that day or no data is available because the Data Collector and the Reporting Database were not installed at that time. 3. Identify the poorly performing jobs and the reasons for the poor performance: a. Click on the color-coded bar segments that represent poor performance as defined by your SLA, drilling down into the actual jobs. As a general guideline, the Backup Start Time SLA report provides a few metrics:
Metric Started Within 30 minutes Started Within 31-60 minutes Started Within 61-120 minutes Started After 120 minutes
Table 10.1 Performance Metrics

Performance Excellent Good Average Poor

b. Identify any trends between backup jobs. For example, are the poorly performing backup jobs associated with a particular server? 4. Implement solutions to increase backup start time performance, such as: Reduce the number of tape mounts. Increase network speed. Add additional processors or upgrade existing processors with faster processors. Increase hard drive speed and size.

152

APTARE StorageConsole Report Users Guide

Backup Status SLA Report

To access this report, in the Navigation pane select:
Backup Manager > SLA Reports > Backup Status SLA

Use the Backup Status SLA report to determine backup success performance and to identify backup failures. A typical backup success percentage might be 85%, as indicated by the Successful Backups Goal line shown in the bar chart.

Changing the Success Percentage

If you want to change the success percentage metric, refer to Defining Report Metrics in the APTARE StorageConsole System Administrators Guide. To change the percentage, you must have permission to write to the Reporting Database. To determine and improve backup success performance, go to Determining and Improving Backup Success Performance.

Backup Status SLA Report

153

Determining and Improving Backup Success Performance

The Backup Status SLA report provides you the ability to drill down into any failed job so that you can identify the cause of the failure. In addition to walking you through this identification process, this procedure provides a checklist to help you improve your backup success performance. To determine and improve backup success performance:
1. Go to the Backup Status SLA Report. 2. For each day, week, or month, hold your cursor over the triangle icon at the top of each bar to display the success rate. Compare this rate against your SLA. Each bar represents a specific day. If no bar appears for a specific day, then no backup jobs ran that day. 3. Use the chart to identify any jobs that failed. 4. Identify any trends between failed jobs. For example, are the failed jobs associated with a particular tape drive or disk drive?

154

APTARE StorageConsole Report Users Guide

Backup Duration SLA Report

To access this report, in the Navigation pane select:
Backup Manager > SLA Reports > Backup Duration SLA

The Backup Duration SLA report displays the total number of backups that completed within the specific time range.

As you are generating your Backup Duration SLA report, consider the following best practices:
Use a consistent duration so that you can develop and compare data across the same interval. Create a duration report for each business unit or for each customer. Depending on how your company stores data, the Administrator can set up server groups for each business unit If you have different SLAs with different groups of users or customers, create a unique report for each SLA so that the data doesnt become skewed. Even if you have the same SLA for all users or customers, consider generating a unique report so that you can share backup duration performance data that is specific to their jobs.

To determine and improve backup duration performance, go to Determining and Improving Backup Duration Performance.

Backup Duration SLA Report

155

Determining and Improving Backup Duration Performance

Use the Backup Duration SLA report to gauge your backup environments efficiency. The Backup Duration SLA report consists of a bar chart. Backup completion time is measured in days. Many backups run for a long time simply because they work with large amounts of data, not because of poor backup duration performance. However, sometimes a job with poor performance might be the result of a faulty tape drive that causes slow write speeds. After you use this Backup Duration SLA chart to identify the backups that represent poor duration performance, you can drill down to determine if there is a problem. Your service level agreement determines what values represent poor performance. However, if you dont currently have an SLA implemented, strive for Good (61-120 minutes) performance by improving backup jobs with Average to Poor performance. The Backup Duration SLA report provides the following metrics:
Metric Completed Within 60 minutes Completed Within 61-120 minutes Completed Within 121-300 minutes Completed After 301+ minutes
Table 10.2 Performance Metrics

Performance Excellent Good Average Poor

To determine and improve backup duration performance:

1. Go to the Backup Duration SLA Report. 2. For each day, observe the number of backups in the bar graphs y-axis or hold your cursor over the color-coded segments to display the number of backups. Each bar represents a specific day. If no bar appears for a specific day, then either no backup jobs ran that day or no data is available because the Data Collector and the Reporting Database were not installed at that time. 3. Identify poorly performing jobs: a. Click on the color-coded bar segments that represent poor performance, as defined by your SLA, drilling down into the actual jobs. Each segment represents a 100% of the overall jobs for the day. b. Identify any trends between backup jobs. For example, are the poorly performing backup jobs taking place at a particular time? 4. Implement solutions to increase backup performance, such as: Back up during a less busy time. Increase network speed. Add additional processors or upgrade existing processors.

156

APTARE StorageConsole Report Users Guide

APTARE StorageConsole Release Notes, v6.5

Chapter10

Backup Storage Utilization Reports

APTARE StorageConsole Release Notes, v6.5 This chapter covers the following topics: Using Storage Utilization Reports Disk Usage and Performance Report Tape Library and Drive Utilization Report Drive Utilization and Performance Report Drive Performance Summary Report TSM Database Utilization Storage Unit Summary Storage Unit Detail Report Storage Unit Event Details Real Time Library and Drive Status

157

Using Storage Utilization Reports

To optimize storage utilization and performance, you can:
Identify duplicate backups. Identify free capacity. Ensure maximum disk utilization throughput. Ensure that jobs start on time. Forecast future storage needs.

A number of practices contribute to storage consumption issues, such as overprovisioning storage and neglecting to deallocate resources. Your data protection strategy should include proactive procedures for reclaiming unused storage. The Portal provides reports to assist you in optimizing storage utilization and performance.

158

APTARE StorageConsole Report Users Guide

Disk Usage and Performance Report

To access this report, in the Navigation pane select:
Backup Manager > Storage Utilization Reports > Disk Usage & Performance Note: This report is a NetBackup-only report.

1. Storage Unit Details 2. Mgmt Server Details 3. Media Server Details 4. Storage Unit File System Info 5. Real-Time Storage Consumption 6. Backup Volume & Throughput 7. Total Disk Usage

Storage Unit Details Mgmt Server Details Media Server Details

The name of the storage unit. Click on the Management Server name link to go to the corresponding Server Details Report. Click on the Media Server name link to go to the corresponding Server Details page.

Disk Usage and Performance Report

159

Storage Unit File System Info

Each storage unit has an associated pathname that determines where the backups are stored. The report shows both the pathname and the actual file system on which the storage unit resides. If more than one storage unit shares the same file system, the report lists the names of the other storage units. Its important to know if other storage units share the same file system since any physical free space on the file system will be shared as one common pool by all the storage units for that file system. Shows the amount of data on the Storage Unit for the selected report scope, grouped by expiration period. Mouse-over the pie slices to view the total number of backups associated with the amount of allocated storage. Click on a pie slice to go to the Storage Unit Details Report, which displays a list of all the active backups that fall within the expiration period and are within the report scope. Each bar in this graph represents the total number of GBytes written to the Storage Unit for backups jobs that completed during the period represented by the bar. Click on a bar to go to the Storage Unit Details Report, which displays a list of all the backups represented by the bar. The dotted line plotted against the secondary y-axis represents the Average Throughput of the backups for the period represented by each bar. The calculation only includes those jobs within the current report scope. The throughput is calculated as follows: backup volume/(sum of all backup durations in seconds)

Real-Time Storage Consumption

Backup Volume & Throughput

Total Disk Usage

Each bar in this graph represents the total amount of space in GBytes occupied by unexpired backups.

160

APTARE StorageConsole Report Users Guide

Tape Library and Drive Utilization Report

To access this report, in the Navigation pane select:
Backup Manager > Storage Utilization Reports > Tape Library & Drive Utilization

The Tape Library and Drive Utilization report displays the average drive utilization against the actual drive utilization for any given time period. Often, this report is used to justify VTL purchases. This report does not display data from HP Data Protector or Symantec Backup Exec.
1. Library Utilization 2. Drillable Stacked Bar Chart 3. Pop-up Details

Library Utilization Drillable Stacked Bar Chart Pop-up Details

At the top of each chart, a summary of the library utilization provides a context for the bar chart. Each bar shows the average amount of time the library drive(s) are being utilized stacked against the actual utilization time. Clicking on any of the bar sections will take you to a Backup Events Report. Mouse-over any of the bars on the chart to launch pop-ups of details.

Tape Library and Drive Utilization Report

161

Storage Unit Detail Report

To access this report, in the Navigation pane select:
Backup Manager > Storage Utilization Reports > Storage Unit Detail

You also can access this report from the Operations Dashboard by clicking on the File Systems link.
Backup Manager > Administration Reports > Operations Dashboard

The Storage Unit Detail report provides a comprehensive view of all tape media in each tape library, groups of tape media outside the libraries, and capacity and usage information for disk storage unit file systems.
Note: This report does not display data from HP Data Protector or Symantec Backup Exec.

Tape Library Details Mgmt Server Details Volume Group Media Usage

Click on a Library name link to go to the Tape Media Summary report for all media inside the library. Click on a Management Server name link to go to the Server Details page for that server. Displays each library or group of tapes outside the library, and each has its own volume group. The media availability for the volume group is represented by a color coded thermometer so it is easy to tell whether there is a healthy amount of media GBytes available for future backups. Click on any Usage or Free values to go to the Tape Media Summary report for a specific tape library. Each library is accompanied by a media alert thermometer whose color is an indicator of the percentage of GByte availability for all media in the library: Green Yellow Red More than 50% available. Less than 50% available. Less than 25% available.

Volume Pool Usage

Displays one or more volume pools, depending on how many exist in the library. Each volume pool has a pie chart that shows the % GBytes Free compared to the % GBytes Used. Click on any part of the pie chart or the Free and Used values to go to the Tape Media Summary report for that tape library.

162

APTARE StorageConsole Report Users Guide

Scratch Pool Media Usage

If there is a designated scratch pool for a Tape Library or Group of Tapes Outside the Library, the report display the scratch pool as a feeder pool to the Volume Pools. Each scratch pool is accompanied by a color-coded scratch pool thermometer that indicates the amount of scratch media available. The value represented is a percentage: the capacity of the scratch media compared to the capacity all media in the library. When there is a designated scratch pool, displays all volume pools in that library that are fed by the scratch pool. Displays details about the disk space of the media servers file system on which the disk storage units reside. The operating system reports this data. Values of Unknown indicate that the Discovery module is not configured to probe the media servers file systems for their physical characteristics. Click on the Management Server name link and the Media Server name link to go to the each servers respective Server Details page. Each file system is accompanied by a thermometer that indicates the percentage of space occupied and available on the file system. The operating system reports the Used value, and this value comprises space occupied by all active backup images (Written) as well as any other files that reside on that file system (Other). Shows the active backups on the Storage Unit grouped by expiration period. Click on a pie slice to go to the Storage Unit Event Details, which displays a list of all the active backups within the particular expiration period.

Volume Pools Fed By Scratch Pool File System Details

File System Usage

Storage Unit Usage

Storage Unit Detail Report

163

Storage Unit Event Details

To access this report, in the Navigation pane select:
Backup Manager > Storage Utilization Reports > Storage Unit Detail

Then, in the file system section of the report, click on a pie slice or pie chart legend link.

Backup ID Client Start Time Finish Time Expiration MBytes # of Files Exit Code

Links to the Job Details Report. Links to the Server Details Report. When the backup job started. Links to the Job Details Report. Date and time of the tape media expiration. Amount of data written to the Storage Unit. Number of files written. Status of the backup job.

164

APTARE StorageConsole Report Users Guide

Drive Utilization and Performance Report

To access this report, in the Navigation pane select:
Backup Manager > Storage Utilization Reports > Drive Utilization & Performance

The Drive Utilization and Performance report enables you to view and compare utilization and performance of the tape drives in your environment. By viewing the total aggregate throughput per drive, you can use this information to help you tune your backup policies.
Note: This report does not display data from HP Data Protector or Symantec Backup Exec.

and Max KBytes/Sec is displayed for every bar during which an event finish time took place. These calculations are available only for periods of time when an event finished. So, if 20 events finish in one of the bar periods, the calculation is based on the average write speed for the total time for all 20 jobs / total bytes written. Likewise, using this example, Max speed would be the maximum of the averages of all 20 jobs.
Avg KBytes/Sec

The Portal does not tie into the hardware directly and monitor the actual drive write speeds. Instead, the reports use the data that the Data Collector retrieved from the backup softwareincluding the amount of data written, job duration time, and job completion timefor each job.

Drive Utilization and Performance Report

165

Drive Details

For each drive, listed at the top of each Drive Utilization and Performance Chart: Drive Name Drive Type Tape Library Name Backup Management Server Click on the Backup Management Server name to view its Server Details page. Mouse-over any chart bar or line symbol to view the corresponding values. Click on the list at the bottom of each chart to go to the Drive Performance Summary Report, which lists all the backup events that took place on that drive for the time period that you specified in the report scope. Additionally, the min, max, and avg KBytes/Sec for the time period are provided at the bottom of the report.

Pop-up Details Drive Summary

Avg & The Avg KBytes/Sec and Max KBytes/Sec is displayed for every bar during which an Max event completed. KBytes/Sec If the report shows a bar with utilization but does not have accompanying line symbols, either no backups or restores completed during that time period or the drive was being utilized for another purpose, such as copying a tape to be vaulted. Local Start Each chart displays the utilization and performance of one drive in the system. The start and End and end time for each chart is localized to the time zone where that drives management Times server is located. For example, if Drive As management server is located in the Pacific Standard Time Zone and Drive Bs management server is located in the Eastern Standard Time Zone (3 hours ahead of Drive As management server) and you ran the Drive Utilization and Performance Report for the last 12 hours, the Drive A charts start and end times would be 3 hours earlier than the chart for Drive B. This start/end time localization enables real time performance comparison between drives, even if they are located in different parts of the world.

166

APTARE StorageConsole Report Users Guide

Drive Performance Summary Report

To access this report, in the Navigation pane select:
Backup Manager > Storage Utilization Reports > Drive Performance Summary

This report also can be generated via a link in the Drive Utilization and Performance Report. This report provides high-level drive details for the reporting period that you specified in the report scope.
Note: If you are accessing this report from the navigation pane, be sure to define a server group scope that is unique by product typefor example, only NetBackup servers. Also, this report does not display Symantec Backup Exec information.

Drive Name Drive # Drive Type Drive Status Library Name Controlling Server Total MBytes # of Backups Min MBytes/Sec Max MBytes/Sec Avg MBytes/Sec

Links to the Drive Performance Detail. Lists the drive number. The drive type label. The current status of the drive. The name of the library. Links to the controlling servers details in a Server Details Report. Total MBytes used. A total for all drives is shown at the bottom of this column. The number of backups that used this drive. These three values provide indicators of the drives performance. The Maximum rate represents the fastest speed that a job ran during the selected time frame. Likewise, the Minimum rate represents the slowest speed that a job ran during the same time frame. For NetBackup specifics, see NetBackup Drive Performance Summary.

Drive Performance Summary Report

167

As an alternative to Server Group scope, you can select Tape Libraries as the scope:
1. In the Drive Performance Summary Report Designer window, click Modify to change the scope.

2. In the Client Selection window, first click Clear All to remove the server groups from the In scope window.

168

APTARE StorageConsole Report Users Guide

3. Click the Tape Library tab to display the list of possible tape libraries in your environment. 4. Double-click the tape libraries to include them in the scope and then click OK.

NetBackup Drive Performance Summary

For NetBackup jobs, the drive performance algorithm takes into account the use of multiple tapes, as some backups require the dismounting and re-mounting of several tapes. The Kilobytes/second rate is calculated for each piece of tape media used by the backup job.
mediaKilobytes / ((finishReadWrite - startReadWrite) * SECS_IN_A_DAY * (mediaKilobytes/jobKilobytes))

Where:
mediaKilobytes is the total kilobytes written to an individual piece of tape media jobKilobytes is the total size of the backup job, as reported by bpdbjobs startReadWrite is the date/time that the job started writing to the tape finishReadWrite is the date/time that the job finished writing to the tape

The Drive Performance Summary report displays the minimum, average, and maximum overall drive performance for all jobs for the reporting period. When you drill down to an individual tape drive, the Drive Performance Detail Report uses this same algorithm to display the performance of each job. If there are multiple rows for a single job, such as when multiple tapes are used by the job, the performance metric is averaged across all the rows returned from the above algorithm. The details from which drive performance is derived can be viewed via drilldown links. In the Drive Performance Detail report, click on the Finish Date for one of the backup jobs to view the Job Details. At the bottom of the Job Details Report, the backup attempts (try records) are displayed.

Drive Performance Summary Report

169

Drive Performance Detail

This report is the result of a drilldown from the Drive Performance Summary Report.

Drive Name Library Name Client Start Time Finish Time Duration Status # of Files MBytes

The drive namethis was the link to this report from the Drive Performance Summary report. The library name links to the Tape Media Summary report. Links to the clients Server Details Report. When the backup job started. Links to the Job Details Report. Duration of the job. Status of the job. The number of files backed up to this drive. Amount of data backed up to this drive. Note: For NetBackup, this value is calculated using the job write start time and job write end time (not the job start time and job finish time). For example, a job can start, but then it can wait in a queue before the job begins to write to a tape/disk. That queue time is eliminated in this calculation.

MBytes/Sec

For NetBackup specifics, see NetBackup Drive Performance Summary.

170

APTARE StorageConsole Report Users Guide

TSM Database Utilization

To access this report, in the Navigation pane select:
Backup Manager > Storage Utilization Reports > TSM Database Utilization

The TSM Database Utilization report provides usage and capacity trending of the TSM database. Using this report, you can determine how much of the allocated database space has been used over the selected report period.
1. Drillable Stacked Bar Chart 2. Pop-up Details 3. Usage & Availability Trending

Each bar shows the average amount of time the library drive(s) are being utilized stacked against the actual amount of utilization time. Click on any bar section will to view the Backup Events Report. Pop-up Mouse-over any of the bars on the chart to display pop-ups including the details of Details that particular bar section. Usage & Shows how much of the allocated database space has been utilized within the TSM Availability database over the time period that you specified in the report scope.
Drillable Stacked Bar Chart Trending

TSM Database Utilization

171

Storage Unit Summary

To access this report, in the Navigation pane select:
Backup Manager > Storage Utilization Reports > Storage Unit Summary

This report is NetBackup-specific.

Library Details File System Details

Click on the library name or server to view the Storage Unit Detail Report. Click on the server name to view the Server Details Report.

172

APTARE StorageConsole Report Users Guide

Real Time Library and Drive Status

To access this report, in the Navigation pane select:
Backup Manager > Storage Utilization Reports > Real Time Library and Drive Status

Use this report to monitor the health of each library. This report displays current highlevel information for each tape library in your environment. The data will only be as current as the time of the most recent poll of your management server(s).
Note: Only NetBackup and Legato NetWorker jobs are supported for this report. Also, the report requires a homogeneous server scopethat is, choose either all NetBackup servers or all Legato servers in your server group scope selection.

Library Type Management Server Slots Drives In Use Drives Available Down

Library name. The type of library, such as Optical or HCART. Click this link to view server details. The number of slots in the library. The number of drives in the library. Number of drives currently in use. Drives - In Use = Drives Available The number of disabled drives. When this number becomes equal to or greater than 25% of the librarys drives, the librarys row of information will be highlighted in red. The percentage of drives in this library that are available.

Avail %

Real Time Library and Drive Status

173

174

APTARE StorageConsole Report Users Guide

APTARE StorageConsole Release Notes, v6.5

Chapter10

Backup Manager Forecasting Reports

This chapter covers the following topics: Forecasting Overview Media Forecasting Dashboard Media Availability Forecast Media Consumption Forecast Tape Drive Usage and Forecast Report Scratch Pool Forecast Report

Forecasting Overview
To ensure accurate forecasts, the reports make the following decisions:
In order to provide a good statistical sample, when you select a display range, the report uses historical data that is twice that display range. If the full range of historical data is unavailable, the data that is available is used. For example, if you want to view data for January of the previous year to December of the current year, the Portal looks for four years worth of historical data. Although the report forecasts the current period, the report ignores the current period when it derives statistical calculations. For example, if the current month is July and you request to view the report by months, the bar for July of this year will be forecasted and data for July of this year will be ignored for statistical calculations.

Forecasting Overview

175

Media Forecasting Dashboard

To access this report, in the Navigation pane select:
Backup Manager > Forecasting & Capacity Planning > Media Forecasting Dashboard

The Media Forecasting Dashboard displays 14 Days of historical consumption and 7 days of forecasted consumption. This report is NetBackup-specific. Using this dashboard, you can pro-actively manage tape availability.

Media Consumption Forecast

Note: Click on the Total Volume Pools link to display the same chart in a new window. A chart appears for each volume pool within the report scope. The dark blue bars indicate historical consumption while the light blue bars indicate consumption predicted for the next 7 days. In order to forecast the 7 days of usage, the report averages day-of-the-week consumption data for the historical period that you specified in the report scope.

In order to forecast the number of tapes consumed each day, the system calculates forecasted consumption by the close of each day using the following algorithm:
1. Tally the Gbyte consumption for all backups written to tape per media type in each volume group. 2. Divide the total GByte consumption for that volume group/media type by the estimated capacity of that media type in that volume group.

Repeat for each volume group/media type instance within the report scope.
The chart displays the aggregate tape consumption results using the circular line symbols.

176

APTARE StorageConsole Report Users Guide

Pop-up Details Mouse-over any of the bars or symbols on the chart to display pop-ups that provide details. Drillable Bars Media Availability Forecast Click on any historical consumption bar to drill down to the Media Usage Detail Report for that day. The Media Availability Forecast plots forecasted consumption against forecasted availability. Note: Click on the Total Volume Pools link to display the same chart in a new window. A chart appears for each volume pool within the report scope.

Repeat for each volume group/media type instance within the report scope.
The system calculates the forecasted availability for the close of each day using the following algorithm: previous days availability + forecasted media expiration - forecasted consumption Media Availability Alerts Media Expiration By Tapes & GBytes The circular line symbol tracks the # of tapes available for each day that the report displays. If the number of tapes available drops below the Availability Threshold, the symbol is red. The default for the Availability Threshold is 25, but you can configure this value for each portal instance. Media Expiration is displayed on a by-Tape and by-GByte basis in the first two pie charts. Note: Click on the Total Volume Pools link to display the same chart in a new window. A chart appears for each volume pool within the report scope. Mouse-over any pie slice to display pop-ups that provide display the data associated with that slice. Click on any of the pie slices or associated legend items to go to the Media Summary report, which shows all the media that expires within the associated time frame. Each piece of media is associated with the slot # as well as the expiration date so that you can easily select and remove media from the library. Each of the Expiration Time Frame Policies defaults to the following: Expire <= 7 Days Expire <= 30 Days Expire <= 90 Days Expire <= 180 Days Expire > 180 Days The Expiration Time Frame Policies are globally configurable parameters for each portal instance.

Media Forecasting Dashboard

177

Real Time Media Status

The pie chart provides a real-time snapshot of all the media that the servers within the report scope are using. Note: Click on the Total Volume Pools link to display the same chart in a new window. A chart appears for each volume pool within the report scope. Mouse-over any of the pie chart sections to display pop-ups with pertinent details about the media of the corresponding status. Click on any section of the pie chart to go to the Tape Media Summary report for all media with the corresponding status. Click on the Total Tape Media link to go to the Tape Media Summary report for all the servers within the report scope.

Scratch & Volume Pools By Media Type

A row for each type of media in each pool (media type/pool instance) within the report scope displays in the Volume Pool Usage Forecast. This report limits the total # of instances to eight. Click on the Total Volume Pools link located at the top right of the component to view a complete report which will include all the media type/pool instances within the report scope. If a scratch pool exists within the report scope, the report displays the scratch pool at the top of the report. If the forecasted consumption for any media type/pool instance exceeds the forecasted availability after the future time period that you selected in the report scope, the row instance is red.

178

APTARE StorageConsole Report Users Guide

Media Availability Forecast

To access this report, in the Navigation pane select:
Backup Manager > Forecasting & Capacity Planning > Media Availability Forecast

The Media Availability Forecast plots forecasted consumption against forecasted availability. This report is NetBackup-specific. The system calculates the forecasted consumption by the close of each day, using the following algorithm: (previous days availability + forecasted media expiration - forecasted consumption) In order to forecast the 7 days of usage, the system averages day-of-the-week consumption data for a historical period specified in the Historical Data Period parameter on the Media Forecasting Dashboard Report Designer. When forecasting the number of tapes consumed on each day, the system tallies the Gbyte consumption for all backups written to tape per media type in each volume group. The system then divides the total GByte consumption for that volume group / media type by the estimated capacity of that media type in that volume group. This process is repeated for each volume group / media type instance within the scope of the report and the aggregated tape consumption results are displayed via the circular line symbols in the bar chart. The circular line symbol tracks the # of tapes available for each day displayed on the chart. Place your mouse over each colored portion of a bar to see the following details for the associated time period:
Currently Available Storage Media Current Consumption Forecasted Consumption Forecasted Available Forecasted Tape Availability (mouse over connected circles at the top of the bars)

Media Availability Forecast

179

Media Consumption Forecast

To access this report, in the Navigation pane select:
Backup Manager > Forecasting & Capacity Planning > Media Consumption Forecast

This report is NetBackup-specific. A bar chart represents historical tape usage, with a projection of future needs. You can select report periods ranging from one week to eight weeks of data. In addition, you can narrow the report scope by choosing specific server groups or even clients within a server group. In order to forecast the seven days of usage, the report averages day-of-the-week consumption data for a historical period specified in the Time Period. In order to forecast the number of tapes consumed on each day, the report tallies the Gbyte consumption for all backups written to tape per media type in each volume group. Then the total GByte consumption for that volume group/media type is divided by the estimated capacity of that media type in that volume group. This process is repeated for each volume group/media type instance within the scope of the report and the aggregated tape consumption results are displayed via the circular line symbols in the bar chart.
Note: The current day is treated as the future for the purpose of forecasting.

180

APTARE StorageConsole Report Users Guide

Media Usage Details

To access this report, in the Navigation pane select:
Backup Manager > Forecasting & Capacity Planning > Media Consumption Forecast Then, click on a Media Consumed bar in the bar chart.

Client Backup ID Mgmt Server Volume Pool Finish Time Weekday Total Written Total Files Estimated Tapes Tape ID

Click this link to view the Server Details Report. Click this link to launch the Job Details Report. The server that is executing the backup policy. Click this link to view the Server Details Report. The name of the volume pool to which the media belongs. Click on this link to launch the Job Details Report. The day of the week on which the backup occurred. Total amount written to the media. Total number of files written to the media. Forecasted tape need for the backup job. Click on these links to launch the Tape Media Detail Report.

Media Usage Details

181

Tape Drive Usage and Forecast Report

To access this report, in the Navigation pane select:
Backup Manager > Forecasting & Capacity Planning > Tape Drive Usage & Forecast

This report does not display data from HP Data Protector or Symantec Backup Exec. Use this report to determine if and when you need to add more tape drives to your libraries. When you customize this report, if you enter a date range in the past, the report will include historical usage information. If your date range includes a finish date beyond the current day, the report will include forecast estimates.
Note: The current day is treated as the future for the purpose of forecasting. Tip: When entering the date range in the Report Designer, use a finish date that is a few weeks or months into the future. This will ensure that a sufficient forecast is produced. Also, to produce a realistic forecast, group the data by Weeks, Months, or Quarters. For this type of report, the time units of Hours and Days are too small to provide meaningful charts.

The report derives the forecast by comparing usage with your existing tape inventory. To be safe, use the highest forecast when determining how many tape drives you need to add. For additional information about the tape drives in your environment, use the Tape Library and Drive Utilization report. The Tape Drive Usage and Forecast Report provides the following information:
# of Tapes drives The number of tape drives in all tape libraries for the report scope that you specified. Usage/Forecast Mouse-over each color of a bar to retrieve the following information: Average tape drives used previously Maximum tape drives used previously Average tape drives forecasted Maximum tape drives forecasted

182

APTARE StorageConsole Report Users Guide

Scratch Pool Forecast Report

To access this report, in the Navigation pane select:
Backup Manager > Forecasting & Capacity Planning > Scratch Pool Forecast

This report does not display data from HP Data Protector or Symantec Backup Exec. A scratch pool is a repository of media that is available to backup servers. There are a few things that affect the availability of media in a scratch pool:
If your backup servers run out of media, they automatically take and use media from the scratch pool. If your backup servers delete data, making media available, they automatically add the recycled media to the scratch pool. When you clean tapes or expire tapes, you temporarily or permanently affect the pool of media. Note: The current day is treated as the future for the purpose of forecasting.

Because backup success is tied directly to scratch pools, its important that you monitor and forecast media usage in the scratch pools.

The Scratch Tape Usage and Forecast Report provides the following information:
# of Tapes drives The number of tape drives in all tape libraries for the report scope that you specified. Usage/Forecast Mouse-over each bar to retrieve the following information: Average scratch tapes used previously Maximum scratch tape used previously Average scratch tapes forecasted Maximum scratch tapes forecasted

Scratch Pool Forecast Report

183

184

APTARE StorageConsole Report Users Guide

APTARE StorageConsole Release Notes, v6.5

Chapter10

Backup Billing and Usage Reports

This chapter covers the following topics: Available Billing and Usage Reports Creating a Billing and Chargeback Policy Determining Media Chargebacks Determining Backup Chargebacks

Available Billing and Usage Reports

The Billing and Usage reports can be used to determine which business units are using your resources. In addition, you can use these reports to calculate chargeback costs. If youre in the process of rolling out chargeback policies, consider using these reports as planning toolsto see what impact your policies might have on your business units or customers. However, you need not charge your business units in order to find the Billing and Usage Reports useful. You simply can use the reports to gauge which business units are consuming the majority of your resources. The following Billing and Usage reports are provided:
Billing and Chargeback Summary Server Consumption Summary

Available Billing and Usage Reports

185

Creating a Billing and Chargeback Policy

This procedure assumes that your server group hierarchy represents the logical relationshipsbusiness units, customers, etc.on which you want to report. When you set the per-GB and per-tape usage costs, you do so at the server group level. Therefore, child server group policies take precedence over parent groups. If a parent server group (Group A) has a billing and usage policy set at $0.50/Gbyte and $35.00/ Tape and a child server group (Group B) has a usage policy set at $0.55/Gbyte and $40.00/Tape, the servers contained in Group B would be billed at $0.55/Gbyte and $40.00/Tape rather than the billing rate of the parent group. When StorageConsole discovers that there is no policy set for any given group, it traverses the server group hierarchy looking for a policy in a parent group until it finds a billing and usage policy to use. If the application cannot find any policy as it searches up the server group hierarchy, a value of $0.00 will be assigned for both per-GB and per-tape usage. To add a new billing policy for a server group:
1. From the Portal toolbar, choose Admin > Billing and Usage Policies. The Billing and Chargeback Administration window appears. 2. Click Add. The Billing and Chargeback Policy Administration window appears. 3. Select a Server Group name to which the policy will apply. Note that a policy set at any particular server group will be assumed by all child server groups that do not have a policy. 4. Enter values for Cost Per GByte, Cost Per Tape, and Cost per Duplicated GB and then click OK.
Cost Per GByte Cost Per Tape Cost Per Dupd GB

The amount each server within the server group should be billed per GB of disk space consumed. The acceptable range is from $0.0001 - $999.9999. The amount each server within the server group should be billed per tape drive consumed. The acceptable range is from $0.0001 - $999.9999. The amount each server within the server group should be billed per duplicated consumption. The acceptable range is from $0.0001 - $999.9999.

186

APTARE StorageConsole Report Users Guide

Determining Media Chargebacks

The Billing and Chargeback Summary report provides a line item of each clients tape consumption. The Billing Summary Report calculates the chargeback based on billing and usage policies as outlined in Creating a Billing and Chargeback Policy. The report displays data based on the servers. This procedure assumes that you know which business units own specific servers. There are a couple of limitations to the billing and chargeback reports:
The report does not consider shared tape usage. If Client A wrote to tapes 1, 2 and 3, the report shows charges for the client for those three tapes. If Client B also wrote to tapes 1 and 2, the report lists charges for that client for those two tapes. Therefore, if both Client A and Client B belong to the same business unit, they are billed twice for two of the three tapes. The report always uses the current cost of a tape. If the cost changes and you generate a new report, the report reflects the new cost. However, if you run an old report from a year ago, it would also pick up the new cost and therefore not be the same as the original report. Therefore, before you change the unit cost, generate and export previous reports for comparison.

To determine chargebacks for a business unit or customer:

1. Go to the Billing and Chargeback Summary report. Each client server row contains subtotals for GB and tape consumption. 2. To limit the data to a single business unit or department, modify the scope of the Billing and Chargeback Summary report. 3. Check the value in the Total Cost field, which appears at the right of the table. This value is the total charge to the business unit or customer. 4. If you want to itemize your chargebacks for your business unit/customer, consider the individual costs that comprise the total.

If you feel that the chargebacks are not accurate, do the following:
Verify that the billing and chargeback policies are accurate. Go to Creating a Billing and Chargeback Policy. Ensure that the server group does not contain clients that belong to another business unit or customer.

Determining Media Chargebacks

187

Determining Backup Chargebacks

The Server Consumption Summary report displays backup consumption and the number of backup files captured for all servers that you specify. The report includes backups that were successful and those that have warnings. It does not include failed backups. To determine server consumption chargebacks:
1. Go to the Server Consumption Summary report. Servers that do not have any consumption or backups for the period that you specified, do not appear in the report. 2. Drill down into the clients, management servers, or backups to get more detail. 3. If you have an ERP system, export the data to your ERP software. Go to Exporting Reports.

188

APTARE StorageConsole Report Users Guide

Billing and Chargeback Summary

To access this report, in the Navigation pane select:
Backup Manager > Billing and Usage Reports > Billing & Chargeback Summary Tip: To limit the data to a single business unit or department, modify the scope of this report.

The usage and billing details are listed in a table, which you can sort by column headers.

Note: If the scope of this report is for NetBackup-only server groups, three additional columns will be included: Total Dup (GB), Cost Per Dupd GB, and Dupd Usage Cost GB, which are set in the Billing and Usage Policies.

To view or modify billing and chargeback items, go to Admin > Billing and Usage Policies.
Client Server Business Unit/ Department

The External Name. Click this link to access Server Details. The full pathname of the server group.

Billing and Chargeback Summary

189

Backed Up Cost Per GB GB Usage Cost # of Tapes Cost Per Tape Total Tape Cost Total Dup (GB) Cost per Dupd GB Dupd Usage Cost Total Cost

The amount of storage consumed by the client server during the specified time period. Click this link to view a Job Summary report. Amount the client is charged per GB of consumption. Backed Up * Cost per GB = GB Usage Cost The # of tapes consumed by the client during the specified time period. Click this link to view a Job Summary report. Amount the client is charged per tape consumed. # of Tapes * Cost per Tape = Total Tape Cost Total duplicated storage (NetBackup-only scope) The charge that has been configured for duplicated storage (NetBackup-only scope) Total Dup * Cost per Dupd = Dupd Usage Cost (NetBackup-only scope) GB Usage Cost + Total Tape Cost = Total Cost

190

APTARE StorageConsole Report Users Guide

Server Consumption Summary

To access this report, in the Navigation pane select:
Backup Manager > Billing and Usage Reports > Server Consumption Summary

The consumption details are listed in a table, which you can sort by column headers. If you are in a large enterprise, this table can get unwieldy, so consider modifying the scope to filter the data by server group. By default, the report lists clients in descending consumption order, with the heaviest consumer at the top. The following algorithm determines total consumption: total disk backup + total tape backup = total consumption
Tip: Sort the data by Tape Backup or Disk Backup to identify heaviest storage device consumers.

The fields are self-explanatory, so they are not described in this section. Use the following links to access additional details:
Link Report Generated

Client Server Last Backup Disk Backup Tape Backup

Server Details Report Server Details Report Job Details Report Job Summary Report Job Summary Report

Server Consumption Summary

191

192

APTARE StorageConsole Report Users Guide

APTARE StorageConsole Release Notes, v6.5

14
Backup Policies Reports

Chapter10

This chapter covers the following topics: NetBackup Policy TSM Policy Domains NetWorker Groups Backup Specification Summary

NetBackup Policy
To access this report, in the Navigation pane select:
Backup Manager > Backup Policies > NetBackup Policies

This report provides the details of the underlying NetBackup Policies that have been defined for your environment.

Management Server Policy Name Type Storage Unit Volume Pool

The server that is executing the backup policy. Click this link to view the Server Details Report. Name assigned to this policy. Click this link to access the Backup Policy Details report. Indicates the specific components it is managingfor example, MS-SQL server, Oracle, NDMP, MS-Windows. The name of the storage unit. The name of the volume pool to which the media belongs.

NetBackup Policy

193

# of Clients Status

# of clients being backed up. The backup status code returned by NetBackup.

Backup Policy Details

To access this report, in the Navigation pane select:
Backup Manager > Backup Policies > NetBackup Policies Then, click on the Policy Name.

The Policy Details include not only a list of clients covered by the policy, but also the scheduling details. Often the list of clients is long, so youll need to scroll to the bottom of the report to see the scheduling details.

194

APTARE StorageConsole Report Users Guide

Policy Details

This section includes details that are found in the NetBackup Policy page. In addition, the following Yes/No indicators reflect the current policy settings: Follow NFS Mount Points Cross Mount Point Client Encryption Client Compress Priority Keyword Max Jobs Per Policy Multiple Streams Client - The Client name. Last Backup - Date of the last backup job. Backups this Month - Number of backup jobs for the current month. Written this Month - Amount of data backed up for the current month. Management Server - The Server responsible for backups. Product Type - Backup solution product name. Make/Model & OS - Clients details, if known.

Client Details

NetBackup Policy

195

TSM Policy Domains

To access this report, in the Navigation pane select:
Backup Manager > Backup Policies > TSM Policy Domains

This report is specific to IBM Tivoli Storage Manager.

Instance Name Domain Name Description

The policy instance. A backup group of file systems and drives. Click this link to access the Policy Domain Details. The domains description. A management class is a policy object that users can bind to each file to specify how the server manages the file. The management class can contain a backup copy group, an archive copy group, and space management attributes. A copy group determines how the TSM server manages backup versions or archived copies of the file. The space management attributes determine whether the file is eligible for migration by the space manager client to server storage, and under what conditions the file will be migrated. If a TSM management class is deleted, files that were associated with it need to rebind to another management class. TSM will keep the backup files for a specified number of days until the server is able to rebind the files to an appropriate management class. After this period, the files will no longer be retained. Retention details are defined in the TSM copy group and default retention grace periods for the domain. If a TSM management class is deleted, files that were associated with it need to rebind to another management class. TSM will keep the archived files for a specified number of days until the server is able to rebind the files to an appropriate management class. After this period, the files will no longer be retained. The number of file servers registered with the TSM server. When the instance became active.

Activated Management Class

Backup Retention Days

Archive Retention Days

Number of Nodes Active

196

APTARE StorageConsole Report Users Guide

Policy Domain Details

To access this report, in the Navigation pane select:
Backup Manager > Backup Policies > TSM Policy Domains Then, click on a Domain Name.

A Policy Set is an object that contains a group of management class definitions that exist for a policy domain. Several policy sets can exist within a policy domain, but only one policy set can be active at a time.

TSM Policy Domains

197

NetWorker Groups
To access this report, in the Navigation pane select:
Backup Manager > Backup Policies > NetWorker Groups

EMC NetWorker provides a Group resource to automate backups on a group-by-group basis. By setting up groups, you can manage the load on backup servers.

Server Group Name Start Time Interval

The EMC NetWorker server that is managing the backups for the associated group. Click on this link to access server details. A group of clients to be backed up. Click this name to view the list of client instances in the Group Detail report. If Autostart is Enabled, the group will begin being backed up at this time. The frequency with which autostart will initiate backups. This attribute indicates if the group will be backed up automatically for each time period specified as the interval. Values include: E = Enabled, which means clients will be backed up automatically at the time specified in Start Time. D = Disabled S = Start now, which means that clients are backed up immediately, overriding the start time. NetWorker allows you to override a scheduled backup by selecting a default group and initiating a Start Now autostart. Backup Status for the group can be one of the following: Running Idle Finished Not Finished (backup exited without completing) Preview Run (test a backup configuration)

Autostart

Schedule Override

Status

198

APTARE StorageConsole Report Users Guide

Group Detail
To access this report, in the Navigation pane select:
Backup Manager > Backup Policies > NetWorker Groups Then, click on a Group Name.

A NetWorker Group provides the mechanism for establishing which clients will be backed up together and then scheduled for their backups. This report displays the NetWorker Group Control details.

The following NetWorker-specific details are provided in this report.

Group Name Schedule Override Start Time Override Level Auto-Start Interval A group of clients to be backed up. NetWorker allows you to override a scheduled backup by selecting a default group and initiating a Start Now autostart. When the group backup is scheduled to begin. Override levels can be configured for a specific date in a NetWorker backup schedule, enabling you to override the backup level setting for every client in that group. When enabled, this attribute triggers regularly scheduled backups. The frequency with which autostart will initiate backups. Backup Status for the group can be one of the following: Running Never Run Finished Not Finished (backup exited without completing) Preview Run (test a backup configuration)

Status

NetWorker Groups

199

Force Incremental

When this field is set to Yes, if two full backups start within a 24-hour period, NetWorker forces the second one to be an incremental backup. (for an interval attribute of less than 24 hours) The last time the group started/ended a save operation. Duration of the last group save. NetWorker uses a cloning process to make copies of saved data. In addition to copying the data, NetWorker keeps track of the details of the cloning operation in a client file index and in the media database. When the Clones attribute is set to Yes, NetWorker automatically clones a save set whenever it is backed up. The Clone Pool indicates where the clones are sent. This restart attribute indicates if a group should be automatically restarted after an incomplete save operation. Indicates the success or failure of the groups save set operations. You can configure NetWorker to be persistent in cases where a client may be hung. Based on the Client Retries value, NetWorker will make multiple attempts at backing up a client before it moves on to other clients. The inactivity (in minutes) before NetWorker determines that the client is hung. The NetWorker server can perform simultaneous backups in either of the following ways: multiple save sets from multiple clients multiple save sets from a single client. Click on this link to access the Client Instance Detail report. Click on this link to access the Job Details Report.

Last Start/End Duration

Clones & Clone Pool

Auto Restart Success Threshold

Client Retries

Inactivity Time-out

Save Group Parallelism Client Instance Name Last Successful Backup

200

APTARE StorageConsole Report Users Guide

Client Instance Detail

To access this report, in the Navigation pane select:
Backup Manager > Backup Policies > NetWorker Groups Then, click on a Group Name and then click on a Client Instance Name.

NetWorker Groups

201

Backup Specification Summary

To access this report, in the Navigation pane select:
Backup Manager > Backup Policies > HPD Backup Specification

The HP Data Protector Backup Specification report lists the Backup Specification, with the objects that are backed up, the servers and the next time the backup will be performed. Note that the objects can be entire disks or volumes, or sub-sets of these, such as directories or the Windows Registry.

Specification Server Object Type

Links to the Backup Specification Detail Backup server The type of data for which the backup specification is configureddatabase entity or a disk image (raw disk)for example, filesystem. Number of clients backed up by this backup specification Full, Incr, Incr 1, Incr 2, Incr 3, Incr 4, Incr 5, Incr 6, Incr 7, Incr 8, Incr 9 Date and time of the next backup

# of Clients Next Backup Mode Next Backup Date

202

APTARE StorageConsole Report Users Guide

Backup Specification Detail

To access this report, in the Navigation pane select:
Backup Manager > Backup Policies > HPD Backup Specification

Then, click on a Specification link. The HP Data Protector Backup Specification Detail report lists the details of the specification, such as mount points and clients. Each of the media must be in a media pool.

Specification Object Type

Specification Name The type of data for which the backup specification is configureddatabase entity or a disk image (raw disk)for example, filesystem. Number of clients backed up by this backup specification Full, Incr, Incr 1, Incr 2, Incr 3, Incr 4, Incr 5, Incr 6, Incr 7, Incr 8, Incr 9 Date and time stamp of the next backup

# of Clients Next Backup Mode Next Backup Date

Backup Specification Summary

203

204

APTARE StorageConsole Report Users Guide

APTARE StorageConsole Release Notes, v6.5

Chapter10

Restoring Files and Folders

This chapter covers the following topics: Restoring Backup Files and Folders Monitoring Progress of Restore

Restoring Backup Files and Folders

The Restore Wizard enables you to restore specific files or folders. To prevent overwriting of original data contained in the files or folders, the Restore Wizard will not allow you to restore files to their original locations. To define a folder or file for a restore:
Before You Begin

Disable pop-up blocking software.

1. From the Portal toolbar, select Tools > Create Restore Job. 2. Type your User ID and restore password. The Restore window appears. 3. Locate the file or folders that you want to restore using the following parameters:
Enter Server Name Search for Backups Made

Specifies the name of the server that originally contained the file you wish to restore. Enter a name and click Check. The Portal searches for the server and when found, returns its IP address. Searches for backups within a specific time period for the selected server. Select a timeframe from the drop-down list. Note: Searching for files works only if the client had file level detail enabled. File level details can be enabled only for NetBackup and Legato. Specify the full name of a specific file or folder. Supply the absolute path of the file/folder and the file/folder name. For example: In UNIX: /export/home/jcollins/apt/design.doc In Windows: C:\marketing\collateral\data_sheet.doc Click Search to look for the file/folder on the backup server. Note: Wildcard searches are supported with the following methods: Type at least the first 3 characters of the file/folder. Type the first 3 characters of the file/folder followed by an asterisk (xyz*).

Enter File or Folder Name

Restoring Backup Files and Folders

205

4. Click on the specific folder or file to select it for the restore process. 5. Specify the directory where the Restore Wizard should save the file or folder. 6. Click Restore, then confirm the restore operation.
Next Step

Monitor the status of the restore. Go to Monitoring Progress of Restore.

Monitoring Progress of Restore

After you initiate a restore of a file or folder, you can monitor the progress of the restore. To monitor progress of restore:
1. From the Portal toolbar, select Tools > Manage Restore Jobs. The window displays the current restore jobs and their associated status:
Date Submitted Requestor Server Name Status Action

Date and Time the restore job was submitted. Drill down to the Restore Jobs Detail Report User Name of the individual requesting the restore job The server of the restore job.

File / Folder File or folder to be restored.

Completion status of the restore process. The Delete button provides the ability to delete a submitted restore job.

2. (Optional) Click on Date Submitted to view the Restore Jobs Detail Report.

206

APTARE StorageConsole Report Users Guide

APTARE StorageConsole Release Notes, v6.5

Chapter10

Capacity Manager Reports

Capacity Manager provides insight into storage users, over-consumption, and underutilized storage. These reports provide end-to-end storage capacity reporting: both a host-to-array view and an array-to-host view.
This chapter covers the following topics: Overview of the Enterprise Storage Provisioning Process Overview of Capacity Manager Reports Why Capacity Manager? Capacity Manager Reports Capacity Manager Quick-Start List Application Capacity & Utilization Array Capacity and Utilization List Array Groups Host Capacity & Utilization Host Utilization Detail LUN Utilization Summary Array Group Details Array Port Utilization Array Capacity Forecast Host Capacity Forecast Applications At Risk Over-Provisioned Applications Application Storage Dashboard Available/Reclaimable Storage Capacity Chargeback and Billing LUNs At Risk Over-Provisioned LUNs Hosts at Risk Over-Provisioned Hosts

In addition, a set of NetApp-specific reports comes packaged with Capacity Manager. These reports are described in NetApp Capacity Reports. A set of reports, specific to the IBM 6000 & 8000 Series, is also available, described in IBM Arrays - Capacity Reports. For an overview of how Capacity Manager works, see the Getting Started Guide for Administrators.

207

Overview of the Enterprise Storage Provisioning Process

The following example of the provisioning process provides insight into how storage can disappear from an enterprise radar screen, causing inefficient use of existing storage and ineffective planning for future requirements.
1. A department requests storage from the provisioning team. Often the request for storage occurs months before a projects servers go online. And, often the request exceeds the true need. 2. The provisioning team sets up a LUN and assigns it to a host. The LUN is not yet available for mounting file systems on the host. 3. The storage allocation ticket is handed off to the group that will manage the host. Often the storage requestor is not the owner of the host. 4. The system administrator must perform a LUN scan or a system re-boot in order for the host to be able to see the LUN. Often, this is the step that doesnt get done.

208

APTARE StorageConsole Report Users Guide

Overview of Capacity Manager Reports

Capacity Manager reports provide insight into the variance between allocated and used storage, along with predictive analysis of future needs. See also, Overview of the Enterprise Storage Provisioning Process.

Why Capacity Manager?

Drive efficient utilization of network storage
Reclaim unused storage Reduce annual storage management costs Defer, reduce, or cancel storage acquisitions Track storage utilization automatically, instead of manually updating spreadsheets that are out-of-date each day

Access application-centric metrics

Metrics provide insight into not only host and storage array usage, but also application usage Applications use storage, not hosts

Capacity Manager Reports

The following table provides a summary of the Capacity Manager reports that can be accessed from the Menu Groups at the left of the Portal window. Each report is described in detail in subsequent sections. In addition, a recommended get-acquainted report sequence is provided in the Capacity Manager Quick-Start List.
Menu Groups & Reports
Storage Capacity & Utilization

Descriptions

Array Capacity and Utilization

Overview of storage array capacity and utilization. Use this report to identify storage arrays that are under-utilized. Drill down to the List Array Groups page to view details about each of the array groups associated with a storage array. Overview of host utilization. Drill down to details in the Host Utilization Detail.Without these reports, you would need to access each host to gather the details. If LUNs are not being used efficiently, you want to know so that you can change their size or reassign them altogether. View all the LUN mapping details, such as mount points and file systems. Drill down to the Array Group Details to view all the LUNs and the physical devices associated with the selected array group. This report can be filtered to display the following subsets of LUN data:
Allocated, but unused Allocated, but undiscovered Unallocated

Host Capacity & Utilization

LUN Utilization Summary

Overview of Capacity Manager Reports

209

Array Port Utilization

Lists the physical/logical port connections between the hosts HBA and the storage array. Use this report to troubleshoot connectivity issues and to re-configure when hosts or arrays are taken out of service. In addition, this report provides information you can use to manage load-balancing across array ports. Summary of how physical aggregates are configured to manage disks, RAID groups, and plexes. See NetApp Capacity Reports. Summary of the logical volume with links to the associated QTree, LUN, and Snapshot details. See NetApp Capacity Reports. Lists the volumes that are exported via NFS. See NetApp Capacity Reports. Lists the volumes that have been exported to Windows hosts via CIFS shares. See NetApp Capacity Reports. Summary of the quota management configurations. See NetApp Capacity Reports. Lists snapshot details for the time reports time interval. See NetApp Capacity Reports. Lists the disk within a storage system. See NetApp Capacity Reports. Lists IBM Array Sites with drilldowns to details. See IBM Arrays - Capacity Reports. Summary of Array capacity with drilldowns to Array, Array Site, and Rank capacity details. See IBM Arrays - Capacity Reports. Summary of IBM Ranks with drilldowns to details. See IBM Arrays - Capacity Reports. Summary of IBM Extent Pools with drilldowns to details. See IBM Arrays - Capacity Reports. Summary of the physical disks with associated array and array site information. See IBM Arrays - Capacity Reports. Summary of the Dynamic Provision Pool capacity details. See HDS Dynamic Provisioning Reports. See HDS Dynamic Provisioning Reports.

NetApp Aggregate Summary NetApp Volume Summary

NetApp NFS Summary NetApp CIFS Summary QTree Summary NetApp Snapshot Summary NetApp Disk Summary IBM Array Site Summary IBM Array Summary IBM Rank Summary IBM Extent Pool Summary IBM Disk Summary Hitachi Dynamic Provisioning Pool Summary Hitachi Disk Summary
Storage Capacity & Forecast

Array Capacity Forecast

Project growth in storage usage. You can generate the report by the following criteria:
Historical date range Forecast horizon (date range) Storage Array Group Forecast by Array Capacity or LUN Capacity

210

APTARE StorageConsole Report Users Guide

Host Capacity Forecast

At-a-glance overview of historical and predicted usagefrom the hosts perspective. You can narrow the scope of this report by specifying a storage type filter of: SAN, DAS, or NAS.

Available or Reclaimable Storage

Array Utilization Summary Allocated but Unused LUNs

Displays a summary listing of each arrays capacity and usage. All the necessary LUN configuration steps have been completed to make this storage available, but it still remains unused. The LUNs have no knowledge of the disks, partitions, or volume groups on the hosts associated with the LUN storage paths. These LUNs have storage paths, but have no knowledge of the disks, partitions, or volume groups on the hosts associated with those storage paths. Lists LUNs that are not allocated to any hosts. These LUNs have no storage paths. Storage often is allocated from a storage array and provisioned to a host, but when that host is re-assigned or de-provisioned, the storage remains unused. This report list hosts that are candidates for re-assignment.

Allocated but Undiscovered LUNs

Unallocated LUNs Suspected De-provisioned Hosts

Unused Partitions/Logical Volumes This report lists logical volumes created from disks or volume groups, but no file systems have been create on these logical volumes. Unused Disks/Volume Groups This report provides insight into wasted space on hosts. It displays the total volume group and disk capacity, along with used and available capacity.

Application Capacity & Utilization

Applications At Risk Over-Provisioned Applications Application Storage Dashboard

Identify applications that are at risk of running out of storage space. Identify applications that are at risk of having over-provisioned storageresulting in wasted storage. This report essentially interrogates the application to identify what storage is free. The table has three main sections of information: Application Storage, File System Storage, and Array Storage. Expand a listed application to see sub-components.

Chargeback and Billing

Utilization By Host Utilization By Storage Tier Utilization By Server Groups

Capacity At Risk

View usage and user-defined chargeback/billing by host. View usage and user-defined chargeback/billing by storage tier. View usage and user-defined chargeback/billing by server groups.

LUNs At Risk

LUNs at risk are determined by evaluating current and projected usage.

Overview of Capacity Manager Reports

211

Over-Provisioned LUNs

Over-provisioning leads to increased costs unless you reclaim the space. Use this report to find wasted spaceat the file system or mount point level. LUNs that appear on this list have storage allocated to hosts that are not fully utilizing that storage. Since this report shows over-provisioning, the list will show usage that has not reached the specified threshold. This report lists only the hosts that require your immediate attention. Use the host link to drill down to particulars. Select a capacity threshold: Low, Warning, Critical. Determine which hosts are over-provisioned. Reclaim the space before committing resources to acquire additional storage. For thin provisioning, this report lists host usage that is about to exceed the storage that was promised. Lists thin-provisioned volumes that may be at risk of overcommitment.

Hosts at Risk

Over-Provisioned Hosts NetApp Aggregates at Risk NetApp Volumes at Risk

212

APTARE StorageConsole Report Users Guide

Capacity Manager Quick-Start List

Use the following sequence of selected reports to become acquainted with the details that support your capacity management process. This quick-start list provides a brief preview of the capacity optimization that can be achieved using Capacity Manager.
Note: Keep in mind that in an enterprise, multiple teams have various responsibilities in the storage provisioning processproviding ample opportunities for storage to drop out of sight.
Capacity Manager Reports 1. LUN Utilization Summary Focus your attention on: Generate this report by selecting one or more storage arrays. Then, expand/contract a row to view the mount point details. See LUN Utilization Summary.

2. Host Capacity & Utilization

3. Host Utilization Detail

4. Over-Provisioned LUNs

5. Array Capacity and Utilization

6. Applications At Risk

Then, generate this report again and in the Report Designer window, select the LUN status of: Allocated but undiscovered. Note that in this version of the report, mount point details are missing because the storage has been allocated, but has not yet been discovered and therefore it cannot be used by an application. This same report is available as: Allocated but Undiscovered LUNs. Without this report, an administrator would have to touch every host to gather information. This report, along with the Host Utilization Detail report, replaces manually created spreadsheets for tracking host usage. Click a host link to view the Host Utilization Detail report. Access this report from a host link in the Host Capacity & Utilization report. Expand the Volume Group Details (click on the +) to identify unallocated space in a Volume Group and logical volumes that are not being used by hosts. These details highlight inefficient use of storage. Expand the Disk Details (click on the +) to view the raw disk paths, storage types, and LUNs associated with disks. Use this report to identify LUNs that have been allocated, but the storage is not being used by the host. Click a host link to view the Host Utilization Detail report. Focus on the two columns at the right of this report RAID Group Capacity and LUN Capacity and their corresponding usage thermometers. If you have NetApp storage, view Array Capacity and Utilization (NetApp View). Identify which applications are expected to exceed storage capacity and when.

Overview of Capacity Manager Reports

213

Array Capacity and Utilization

To access this report, in the Navigation pane select:
Capacity Manager > Storage Capacity & Utilization > Array Capacity & Utilization

Use this report to identify storage arrays that are underutilized or highly utilized. For additional Capacity Manager information, see Overview of Capacity Manager Reports. Several versions of this report display data relevant to the type of storage: NetApp - Because NetApp utilizes a number of unique constructssuch as Aggregates and Volumesto organize and access its storage, additional NetAppspecific data is available via this report. For information about the NetApp-specific version of this report, see Array Capacity and Utilization (NetApp View).
HDS Dynamic Provisioning - View details related to Dynamic Provisioning Pools via the Array Capacity & Utilization (HDP View). IBM Arrays - View array details, including Extent Pool, Array Site, and Rank capacity via the Array Capacity & Utilization (IBM Enterprise Array View). Other Storage Arrays - The information from all other storage array types is displayed in the format shown below.

The report is organized into four columns:

1. Array Summary 2. Raw Capacity - Raw capacity is the summation of the physical disks. Usable space is the space that is calculated from RAID groups and LUNs.

214

APTARE StorageConsole Report Users Guide

3. RAID Group Capacity or Aggregate/Volume Capacity (for NetApp storage) 4. LUN Capacity

Array Summary

The array information can be used to reference the array vendors capacity limits.
The name that you assigned to the array. Available values include all supported storage devices. For a list of supported devices, see the Array Name APTARE StorageConsole Certified Configurations Guide. From here you can drill down to the array. Family Type Vendor Product The family classification of the storage array as assigned by the vendor. Use this name to ascertain the vendors product specifications. The specific model of the storage array. The name of the vendor that distributes the storage array. The name of the product, typically shown as a series number. This field provides an indicator of capacity specifications, such as LUNs, hosts per array, and drives per array. This is the total number of unique hosts that have LUNs assigned by this storage array, and the hosts have been successfully queried using one or more host resource policies. If zero, host resources data has not been collected. Click on the Hosts link to go to the Host Capacity & Utilization. The number of ports in the array. Click on this link to view the Array Port Utilization. Links to the LUN Utilization Summary.

# Hosts

# Ports Host Usage

Array Capacity and Utilization

215

Raw Capacity

This column of information summarizes capacity and usage. The percentages, in particular, capture the essence of your current utilization status. NOTE: When calculating capacity, Capacity Manager makes requests to the Device Manager for physical devices (PDEVs) for all Array Groups in a storage array.

Capacity

For EMC Symmetrix arrays: Sum of the capacity of all physical disks from all array groupsno spares. Note: When viewing raw capacity in EMC Control Center, disk group 0 (hot spares) is not included in the total capacity calculationaccounting for the difference between the EMC and Capacity Manager reported capacity values. For EMC CLARiiON arrays: Sum of the capacity of all physical disks from all array groupsincluding spares (drives that are not allocated to an array group) For HDS arrays: Sum of capacity of all PDEVs from all array groups. Capacity Manager assumes that all PDEVs are part of an array group, so PDEVs that are marked as not included in an array group (-1) are included in the capacity calculation. That is, no disks are treated as spares. Total raw capacity of the LUNs in the array that have been mapped to a host. These LUNs are typically configured as volumes on the host and dedicated to an application.Unallocated storage is storage that is not part of an Array Group. Total raw capacity of the array that has not been carved into a RAID group. The size is displayed in the units you selected with the Advanced option when you generated the report.

Allocated Size Available Size

Expressed as a percentage, total capacity of the LUNs in the array that have not been assigned to a host and that are available for provisioning. % Available This percentage is a better capacity indicator than the number shown as Available Size. Raw Usage Expressed as a percentage, total capacity of the LUNs in the array that have been assigned to a host and that are not available for provisioning.

216

APTARE StorageConsole Report Users Guide

RAID Group Capacity

The RAID Group information can be used to identify array group statistics.
The number of array groups in the storage array. Links to List Array Groups. Total capacity of the array groups in the storage array. All the capacity from the attached disks Capacity from a back-end system Applicable to HDS arrays only Derived from daisy-chained external storage (back-end systems); This is array group capacity that does not have PDEVs in the storage array. Total used capacity of the array groups (by LUNs) in the storage array. Available capacity of the array groups in the storage array. Thermometer with mouse-over that displays the percentage used

# RAID Groups RAID Groups Capacity Local Capacity

Virtual Capacity

RAID Groups Used RAID Groups Available RAID Group Usage

LUN Capacity

Several LUN fields enable drill-down access to additional details so that you can determine the capacity of each configured LUN.
The number of LUNs that have been created on the array. Click on the Used link or the LUN link to go to the LUN Utilization Summary Report. The number of LUNs on the array that have been mapped to a host. These LUNs are typically configured as volumes on the host and dedicated to an application. storagearray arrayport hoststoragedomain HBAport host Click on the Allocated LUNs link or the LUN link to go to the LUN Utilization Summary Report. Allocated LUN The total storage capacity for the allocated LUNs. Capacity UnAllocated LUNs UnAllocated LUN Capacity LUN Usage The number of LUNs that have yet to be allocated. The available LUN capacity. Thermometer with mouse-over that displays the percentage allocated

# LUNs

# Allocated LUNs

Array Capacity and Utilization

217

List Array Groups

This report provides a summary of each of the array groups associated with a storage array, with drilldowns to additional details.

Group Name Array Name Chassis Number RAID Type Total Capacity Allocated Capacity Free Capacity

The name of the array group, which links to Array Group Details. The array name links to the Array Capacity and Utilization. The chassis to which the group belongs. RAID type Total storage capacity of the group. Allocated storage capacity Available storage

218

APTARE StorageConsole Report Users Guide

Host Capacity & Utilization

To access this report, in the Navigation pane select:
Capacity Manager > Storage Capacity & Utilization > Host Capacity & Utilization

Use the Host Capacity and Utilization report to view an overview of host utilization.Typically, once youve reviewed this high-level report, youll want to access the details reported by the Host Utilization Detail.

Host # of Allocated LUNs Allocated Capacity

The name of the host utilizing the storage. Click on a Host name link to view the Host Utilization Detail. The number of LUNs that have been allocated to this host. Click on this number to launch the LUN Utilization Summary. The total capacity of all Volumes both free and used that has been given to the host. When there is a significant discrepancy between the Allocated Capacity and the Used Capacity, it is an indication that there may be storage that can be reclaimable. LUNs that are currently used by the host. Click on this number to launch the LUN Utilization Summary. The sum of all SAN capacity actually deployed or accepted by the host. This is the storage that the host has been allocated and is usingbut this use could be as simple as adding the storage to a volume group. It does not mean that the server has that storage mounted. Mounted storage is reflected in Volume Capacity. The total arrays associated with this host. Click on the number to launch the Array Capacity and Utilization. Hosts that are related to this host via clusteringthey have multipathing to the same LUNs for failover. The number of volumes created from the allocated LUNs, broken out into SAN/DAS, NAS, and At Risk.

# of Used LUNs Used Capacity

# of Arrays Related Hosts # Volumes

Host Capacity & Utilization

219

Volume Capacity Volume Usage # of Volumes at Risk

Total storage capacity of the host, including SAN/DAS and NAS. This is the actual amount of storage used by the host, broken out by storage type: SAN/DAS and NAS. The number of host volumes that are at risk of reaching capacity, based on configured thresholds. Click on the number link to view the Host Utilization Detail.

For additional Capacity Manager information, see Overview of Capacity Manager Reports.

220

APTARE StorageConsole Report Users Guide

Host Utilization Detail

To access this report, in the Navigation pane select:
Capacity Manager > Storage Capacity & Utilization > Host Capacity & Utilization

Then, drill down to the details. Click a # of Volumes at Risk link. In addition, this report can be accessed from several other reports via drill-down links, as shown in the following table:
From this Report: LUN Utilization Summary Host Utilization Summary Array Port Utilization LUNs At Risk Hosts At Risk Click this Link:

Host Host Host Host Name

Use this Host Utilization Detail report to quickly determine critical capacity issues. In particular, focus on the % Available column to find specific at-risk volumes. When a host falls below the designated threshold, the data in the % Available column displays in a different color to call your attention to the problem.

Figure 16.1 Host Utilization Detail (Overview)

Host Utilization Detail

221

Figure 16.2 Host Utilization Detail (Part 1)

Figure 16.3 Host Utilization Detail (Part 2)

222

APTARE StorageConsole Report Users Guide

Mount Point Raw File System

Mount point of the file system File system name When you know the file system type, you can determine the hosts storage requirements and limitations. Examples of file system values: NTFS - Windows NT File System ext2, ext3 - Extended File Systems 2 and 3 ufs - Unix File System vxfs - Veritas File System FAT - File Allocation Table hfs - Hierarchical File System (Apple) ctfs - Cooperative Temporary File System devfs - Device File System hsfs - High Sierra File System jfs - Journaled File System jfs2 - Journaled File System 2 nfs - Network File System objfs - File System Object sfs - Secure File System gpfs - General Parallel File System (IBM) proc - a virtual file system procfs - Process File System tmpfs - a virtual memory file system smbfs - Server Message Block File System Null - empty NA - not applicable

File System Type

Storage Type

NAS - Network-attached storage; file servers and software dedicated to providing files over a network. SAN - Storage area network; Fibre Channel connected file servers. DAS - direct-attached storage; part of the host computer. The volume group and logical volume names. The hosts file system storage capacity. The amount of the hosts storage that is currently in use. The percentage of the capacity that is unused.

Volume Group Capacity Used % Available

Host Utilization Detail

223

90 Days Min Used 90 Days Avg Used 90 Days Max Used NAS Shares

Use these three columns in combination to substantiate the need for additional storage. Using 90 days worth of data, this provides a realistic snapshot of how the forecast was derived. This Network Attached Storage Shares table provides details similar to the mount point table, without the Volume Group column. Shows any LUNs that have not been partitioned or allocated to a volume group. Therefore, they are not associated with a mount point or file system. This list will be displayed for LUNs that match this allocated but unused criteria. Lists the disks associated with the hosts utilization. This table can be expanded and contracted with the + or - signs at the left of the Disks label. Expand the Disk Details (click on the +) to view the raw disk paths, storage types, and LUNs associated with disks. Multi-pathed disks also are represented in this list. Multipathing is supported for the following products: EMC PowerPath, Hitachi Dynamic Link Manager (HDLM), and Symantec Dynamic Multi Pathing (DMP). Expand the Volume Group Details (click on the +) to identify unallocated space in a Volume Group and logical volumes that are not being used by hosts. These details highlight inefficient use of storage. This table will be present only when there are one or more volume groups set up on the selected host. The table displays each volume group along with the physical disks that have been allocated to the volume group and the logical volume details. Use this table to find any un-allocated storagethat is, space that is available within the volume group that has not been assigned to a logical volume. If the Array name is missing from a table entry it is because it is a local disk. Note: Totals in a Volume Group reflect usable capacityso, for example, RAID 1 mirrored disks will show only the capacity that is usable.

Allocated and Unused LUNs

Disks

Disk Partitions/ Volume Group Details

Group Membership

Displays the server groups for which the host is a member. Click on a server group link to view additional membership details.

Note: The Capacity and Used columns are aggregated and then converted to the units selected in the Advanced option of the report from which the Host Utilization Detail was launched. Note that in the conversion to the displayed units, the totals may appear to be slightly inaccurate. This is due to the division or multiplication by 1024.

224

APTARE StorageConsole Report Users Guide

LUN Utilization Summary

To access this report, in the Navigation pane select:
Capacity Manager > Storage Capacity & Utilization > LUN Utilization Summary

If LUNs are not being used efficiently, you want to know so that you can change their allocation or reassign them altogether. Using the LUN Utilization Summary, you can view all the mapping details, such as mount points and file systems.
For NetApp-specific LUN Utilization details, see NetApp LUN Utilization Summary. For additional Capacity Manager information, see Overview of Capacity Manager Reports.

This report can be filtered (in the Report Designer window) to report on the following subsets of data:
Unallocated - These are simply LUNs that have not been allocated to any host. The array has created the LUN, but there is no storage path. Allocated, but undiscovered - Often referred to as orphaned LUNs, these are LUNs that have been assigned to a host, but they have not been discovered and therefore are not seen on the host side. The array has created the LUN and the storage path exists, but there is no access to host port and host information, such as disks, partitions, and volume groups. To make these LUNs visible to the host, a system administrator must execute a LUN scan or, for older OS and volume manager versions, re-boot the system. Otherwise, this storage is not available for mounting file systems. The LUN scan tells the HBA (host bus adapter) that a LUN has been zoned to the host. Allocated, but unused - These are LUNs that have been assigned to a host, but the host has not been placed into a volume group, or a partition has not been created. The array has

LUN Utilization Summary

225

created the LUN and the storage path exists, making the host and host port information available to Capacity Manager. However, the host storage detailsdisks, partitions, and volume groupsare not available for the host associated with the storage path. Note: The list of Allocated, but unused LUNs will always include the Allocated, but undiscovered LUNs, along with the additional LUNs that may not have been discovered.

Click on the arrow to drill down to a hierarchical detailed view, including mount point details. This arrow is not displayed if the LUN does not have multiple mount points or has no mount points. Name Raid Type Aggregate Volume QTree Array Group Array Name Capacity Estimated Used Estimated Available Mount Point Used The name of the LUN. The RAID level on the LUN. When the RAID type indicates Disk, there is no RAID protection. (NetApp only) (NetApp only) QTree associated with the LUN (NetApp only) The group to which the array belongs. Links to the Array Group Details. The array on which the LUN was created. Click on the array name link to go to the Array Capacity & Utilization report. The total capacity (used and unused) of the LUN. LUN estimated used. See Estimated LUN Usage/Availability. Estimated available LUN storage. The amount of storage used by each mount point. These values are displayed when a LUN is expanded to view mount point details. The name of the host to which the LUN was allocated. Click on a host link to launch the Host Utilization Detail. The hosts file system mount point for this LUN. Note: Its possible to have zero mount points and file systems, in the scenario where a LUN has been allocated to the host, but the host has not yet made use of it by creating a file system and mounting it. File System Volume Group iGroup The hosts file system or drive name to which the LUN maps. LUNs simply appear as disks to hosts. The logical collection or volume group to which the volume belongs. Initiator Group name. For NetApp storage, a LUN is mapped to an iGroupa method of LUN masking.

Host Mount Point

226

APTARE StorageConsole Report Users Guide

Host Storage Domain

The name of the host storage domain, a logical group of LUNs that can be accessed by multiple hosts through the same physical storage port, with each host accessing its unique LUN. For security purposes, LUN masking is also coupled with this capability. Note: A host storage domain is Hitachis name for multi-hosted storage capability.

Array Port WWN Last Updated iSCSI Interface

The unique identifier, World Wide Name, of the array port address. The time stamp of the last host update. The iGroup contains an iSCSI qualified name that maps to a LUN. (NetApp only)

LUN Utilization Summary

227

Estimated LUN Usage/Availability

Several Capacity Manager reports display certain LUN values as estimatedEstimated Usage, Estimated Available. These values are estimated because of the following logic for deriving the values:
A volume group has members that are made up of many disks. These disks may be local disks or LUNs from one or more arrays. Partitions are created from a volume group and then the partition is mounted onto a host, so that the host can use the mounted partition. Because of the above sequence, Capacity Manager cannot determine which partition

came from which LUN. Therefore, using the available information, the values are estimated.

228

APTARE StorageConsole Report Users Guide

Array Group Details

To access this report, in the Navigation pane select:
Capacity Manager > Storage Capacity & Utilization > LUN Utilization Summary

Then, drill down to the details: Click an Array Group link.

This report lists all the LUNs and the physical devices associated with the selected array group.

EMC CLARiiON Storage Array Group Specifics

For EMC CLARiiON storage arrays, the operating system uses a small amount of storage for internal processing. So, in the Array Group Details report, you will notice a difference in the Total (at the top left of the report) and the sum of the Capacity in the List of Physical Devices table (at the bottom right of the report).

Array Group Details

229

Array Port Utilization

To access this report, in the Navigation pane select:
Capacity Manager > Storage Capacity & Utilization > Array Port Utilization

This report provides a list of the physical/logical port connections between the hosts adapter and the storage array. Use this report to troubleshoot connectivity issues and to re-configure when hosts or arrays are taken out of service. In addition, this report provides information you can use to manage load-balancing across array ports. For additional Capacity Manager information, see Overview of Capacity Manager Reports.

Array Name

The array you want to manage. Links to the Array Capacity and Utilization. You can select multiple storage arrays or a single array when you generate this report. World Wide Name, of the array port address. Name of the host that owns the HBA (host bus adaptor) port. Links to the Host Utilization Detail. List of the host ports. The mount point of the file system thats utilizing the port. Name of the file system.

Array Port WWN Host Host Ports Mount Point File System

230

APTARE StorageConsole Report Users Guide

When you know the file system type, you can determine the hosts storage requirements and limitations. Examples of file system values: NTFS - Windows NT File System ext2, ext3 - Extended File Systems 2 and 3 ufs - Unix File System vxfs - Veritas File System FAT - File Allocation Table hfs - Hierarchical File System (Apple) ctfs - Cooperative Temporary File System devfs - Device File System hsfs - High Sierra File System jfs - Journaled File System jfs2 - Journaled File System 2 nfs - Network File System objfs - File System Object sfs - Secure File System gpfs - General Parallel File System (IBM) proc - a virtual file system procfs - Process File System tmpfs - a virtual memory file system smbfs - Server Message Block File System Null - empty NA - not applicable

File System Type

Capacity Used

Capacity of the file system. The amount of the storage array being used by the file system.

Array Port Utilization

231

Array Capacity Forecast

To access this report, in the Navigation pane select:
Capacity Manager > Storage Capacity & Forecast > Array Capacity Forecast

Use the Capacity Forecast report to project growth in storage usage. You can generate the report by the following criteria:
Historical date range Forecast horizon (date range) Storage Array Group Forecast by Array Capacity or LUN Capacity

In addition, you can choose to generate graphs for each, individual array or instead, display a consolidated graph for all the arrays selected in the Report Designer.

Mouse-over the markers on the lines to view:

Historical Usage: Allocated and Total Capacity Forecasted Usage: Allocated and Total Capacity

The Array name links to the Array Capacity and Utilization.

Array The name of the storage array. Links to the Array Capacity and Utilization. This line tracks the historical and forecasted allocation. Allocated Capacity This line tracks the historical and forecasted capacity. Total Capacity

For additional Capacity Manager information, see Overview of Capacity Manager Reports.

232

APTARE StorageConsole Report Users Guide

Host Capacity Forecast

To access this report, in the Navigation pane select:
Capacity Manager > Storage Capacity & Forecast > Host Capacity Forecast

This forecast report provides an at-a-glance overview of historical and predicted usage.
Note: To ensure that your report reflects both historical and forecasted usage, when you generate the report, verify that your date range starts on a past date and ends on a future date. The current day is treated as the future for the purpose of forecasting. Typically, if you specify three months before and after the current day, youll have sufficient data for a valid forecast. The default display is Grouped by Months. However, to see results based on previous weeks, choose Group by Weeks in the Report Designer. The Group by Weeks option is especially useful during the first few weeks of Capacity Manager deployment.

You also can narrow the scope of this report by specifying a storage type filter of: SAN, DAS, or NAS. When you generate this report, you can select the type of outputeither by host or by file system. If you select file system, the specific path, host name, and mount point will be associated with each graph.

1. Mouse-over the thermometer to view usage. 2. Mouse-over the markers on the lines to view: Historical Usage: Average and Maximum Size Forecasted Usage: Average and Maximum Size 3. Click the Host link to launch the Host Utilization Detail. 4. Click the Total Volumes link to view the Host Capacity Forecast by File System. Date Avg Size Max Size The first day of the period for which the usage is projected. The historical average usage. The historical maximum usage.

Host Capacity Forecast

233

Avg Size Future Max Size Future

The projected usage based on the average usage history (or historical average usage for periods in history). The projected usage based on the maximum usage history (or historical average usage for periods in history).

For additional Capacity Manager information, see Overview of Capacity Manager Reports.

234

APTARE StorageConsole Report Users Guide

Applications At Risk
To access this report, in the Navigation pane select:
Capacity Manager > Application Capacity & Utilization > Applications At Risk

Using this report, you can identify applications that are at risk of running out of storage space. Identify which applications are expected to run out of storage and when.

Note: The Applications at Risk report supports the following applications: SQL Server and Oracle Database. Name Risk Date Usage Projected HighWater Mark Capacity Current Usage The application at risk. The first date of the period for which the usage is projected. The risk date is based on the historical growth of the applications usage. The projected usage based on the average usage history (or historical average usage for periods in history). The projected usage based on the maximum usage history (or historical average usage for periods in history). The database capacity. Database storage already in use. Thresholds can be set by an administrator using Admin > Threshold Policies. When determining when an application is at risk, several factors are taken into consideration. First, if a threshold has been set for a particular applicationthat is, a database threshold then that threshold is used to determine the risk. If there is no threshold associated with the applications database, then other thresholds are checked, in the following sequence: Host for the associated LUN/Filesystem/Database Server group to which the host belongs Top-level, global server group If no threshold settings are found at the above levels, the system defaults are used: 90% for Critical, 70% for Warning, and 30% for Low.

Threshold

For additional Capacity Manager information, see Overview of Capacity Manager Reports.

Applications At Risk

235

Over-Provisioned Applications
To access this report, in the Navigation pane select:
Capacity Manager > Application Capacity & Utilization > Over Provisioned Applications

Using this report, you can identify applications that are at risk of having overprovisioned storage. Often, storage is allocated to a project, but never used. This report helps you to identify excess, unused storage so that it can be reclaimed for another purpose.

Name As of Usage High-Water Mark Capacity Current Usage Available Threshold

The application that has been given storage that remains unused. The first date of the period for which the usage is projected. The projected usage based on the average usage history (or historical average usage for periods in history). The projected usage based on the maximum usage history (or historical average usage for periods in history). The database capacity Database storage already in use Amount of storage still available An application is determined to be over-provisioned when the usage is under the threshold.

For additional Capacity Manager information, see Overview of Capacity Manager Reports.

236

APTARE StorageConsole Report Users Guide

Application Storage Dashboard

To access this report, in the Navigation pane select:
Capacity Manager > Application Capacity & Utilization > Application Storage Dashboard

This report essentially interrogates the application to identify what storage is free. In addition, this report provides data that can be used to resolve performance issues. The table has three main sections of information: Application Storage, File System Storage, and Array Storage.
Click on the arrow to drill down to a hierarchical Application Sub-Level of the Application Storage Dashboard view. Each subsequent drilldown takes you to the next level of the application, such as the table space and file system level. Application The name of the level. For the application level, the name will be specific to the application, such as Exchange or Oracle. If it is the tablespace level, the name of the respective tablespace is displayed. Total storage allocated to the application. App. Used + App. Free = App. Total Note: The total may not be precise to the decimal, as 1 Kbyte = 1024. App. Free Amount of storage available for the application. In some cases, storage does not need to be pre-allocated to the application, so this field will display as N/A. Amount of storage consumed by the application. This is the amount of consumed storage as reported by the application. For example, in Oracle within a data file it would display how much space is really being consumed by Oracle. This total indicates the amount of storage used by the file system associated with the application. Amount of unused and available file system storage.

App. Total

App. Used

File Total File Free

Application Storage Dashboard

237

File Used Array Total Array Free Array Used LUNs

Amount of used file system storage. This total indicates the amount of storage used by the array on which this application is located. Amount of available array storage. Amount of used array storage. A concatenated list of LUNs from which the space is being taken by this application.

For additional Capacity Manager information, see Overview of Capacity Manager Reports.

238

APTARE StorageConsole Report Users Guide

Application Sub-Level of the Application Storage Dashboard

To access this report, in the Navigation pane select:
Capacity Manager > Application Capacity & Utilization > Application Storage Dashboard Then, click the arrow to drill down to the Application Level detail.

The data displayed in this window is simply the next level within the applicationthat is, instance-level reporting, as described in Application Storage Dashboard. At the application sub-level, a host link launches the Host Utilization Detail. For example, an Oracle Database Administrator may be interested in managing storage at the tablespace level. Using the Application Storage Dashboard, the administrator can expand the Oracle application to view table space and also file system usage. In essence, this view provides the physical implementation of the file system, including the LUNs allocated to it.

Application Sub-Level of the Application Storage Dashboard

239

Available/Reclaimable Storage
The reports in this menu group provide the data for realizing your ROIReturn on Investment. By identifying underutilized storage, an enterprise can optimize existing storage resources and possibly defer purchases.

Array Utilization Summary

This report can be used to identify the percentage of raw storage that has been allocated to RAID groups and, more importantly, the percentage of raw capacity that is available.

Additional details can be accessed via the following drill-down links in the report:
Storage Array or VFiler - NetApp Storage System Detail # Groups - List Array Groups # LUNs - LUN Utilization Summary

For additional Capacity Manager information, see Overview of Capacity Manager Reports.

240

APTARE StorageConsole Report Users Guide

Allocated but Unused LUNs

These are LUNs that have been assigned to a host, but the host has not been placed into a volume group, or a partition has not been created. The array has created the LUN and the storage path exists, making the host and host port information available to Capacity Manager. However, the host storage detailsdisks, partitions, and volume groupsare not available for the host associated with the storage path.

Note: The list of Allocated, but unused LUNs will always include the Allocated but Undiscovered LUNs, along with the additional LUNs that may not have been discovered.

Additional details can be accessed via the following drill-down links in the report:
Array Group - Array Group Details Array Name - Array Capacity and Utilization Host - Host Utilization Detail

For descriptions of the displayed fields, see LUN Utilization Summary. For additional Capacity Manager information, see Overview of Capacity Manager Reports.

Available/Reclaimable Storage

241

Allocated but Undiscovered LUNs

Often referred to as orphaned LUNs, these are LUNs that have been assigned to a host, but they have not been discovered and therefore are not seen on the host side. The array has created the LUN and the storage path exists, but there is no access to host port and host information, such as disks, partitions, and volume groups. To make these LUNs visible to the host, a system administrator must execute a LUN scan or, for older OS and volume manager versions, re-boot the system. Otherwise, this storage is not available for mounting file systems. The LUN scan tells the HBA (host bus adapter) that a LUN has been zoned to the host.

Additional details can be accessed via the following drill-down links in the report:
Array Group - Array Group Details Array Name - Array Capacity and Utilization

For descriptions of the displayed fields, see LUN Utilization Summary. For additional Capacity Manager information, see Overview of Capacity Manager Reports.

242

APTARE StorageConsole Report Users Guide

Unallocated LUNs
These are simply LUNs that have not been allocated to any hosts. The array has created the LUNs, but there are no storage paths.

Additional details can be accessed via the following drill-down links in the report:
Array Group - Array Group Details Array Name - Array Capacity and Utilization

For descriptions of the displayed fields, see LUN Utilization Summary. For additional Capacity Manager information, see Overview of Capacity Manager Reports.

Available/Reclaimable Storage

243

Suspected De-provisioned Hosts

Sometimes LUNs have been assigned to a host, but later, that host is re-assigned or deprovisioned. Often when hosts are retired, their storage is not given back to the pool and that storage remains unused. Capacity Manager identifies suspected de-provisioned hosts by determining data stalenessthat is, finding hosts for which data has not been collected within the specified time period. The default period is 14 days, however, you can choose from 3 days to a year for the reports time period. Hosts in this list deserve further investigation to determine if they truly have been de-provisioned.

Additional details can be accessed via the following drill-down links in the report:
Array Group - Array Group Details Array Name - Array Capacity and Utilization Host - Host Utilization Detail

For additional Capacity Manager information, see Overview of Capacity Manager Reports.

244

APTARE StorageConsole Report Users Guide

Unused Partitions/Logical Volumes

This report lists all hosts with logical volumes that have no mounted file systems. A logical volume may have been created in the volume group, but the logical volume is not being used by the host. These unused volumes provide available storage.

Additional details can be accessed via the following drill-down links in the report:
Host - Host Utilization Detail

For additional Capacity Manager information, see Overview of Capacity Manager Reports.

Available/Reclaimable Storage

245

Unused Disks/Volume Groups

Use this report to view a list of hosts that have available space. These hosts have space from which more partitions or logical volumes can be created. This report can be used to identify storage that has been requested, but that is not being used. Then, the list can be emailed to the group that has requested the storage.
Note: In this report, if the RAID type = 1, the capacity is divided by 2, to reflect true usable capacity.

Additional details can be accessed via the following drill-down links in the report:
Host Name - Host Utilization Detail

For additional Capacity Manager information, see Overview of Capacity Manager Reports.

246

APTARE StorageConsole Report Users Guide

Capacity Chargeback and Billing

Capacity Chargeback Policies are configured by the StorageConsole Administrator. The administrator uses these policies to assign a cost-per-GB and tier, to hosts in a server group. The tier is assigned by default, as it is associated with the storage array family, as shown in the following table. The array family is passed in by data collection and the billing report uses the family to determine the tier. Storage Tier assignments represent how data is classified in your organization, providing a means of offering specific service levels to departments and projects.

Table 16.1 Default Storage Array Tier Settings for Capacity Chargebacks

Storage Array

Tier

AMS HDS 9900 HDS 9200 HDS 9500V WMS HDS 9900V Symmetrix 3000 Symmetrix 5000 Symmetrix 8000 Symmetrix DMX AX Series CX Series CX3 Series USP

1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1

Capacity Chargeback and Billing

247

Utilization By Host
To access this report, in the Navigation pane select:
Capacity Manager > Chargeback and Billing > Utilization By Host

For additional details, refer to:

Capacity Chargeback and Billing for a list of storage arrays and default tier settings. Application Administrators Guide for details on configuring a Capacity Chargeback Policy.

Host IP Address

Host name Hosts IP address

248

APTARE StorageConsole Report Users Guide

The tier to which the array belongs. The tier implies the importance to your business. Storage Tier Tier 1. Used for business-critical data and I/O intensive applications. Tier 2. Used for important, but not business-critical data or low I/O intensive applications. Tier 3. Used for less critical data. Total number of LUNs currently in use. The explicit amount of storage in use. The rate that was set in the billing and chargeback policy. Usage * Cost-per-GB = Total Cost

# of LUNs Usage Cost Per GB Total Cost

For additional Capacity Manager information, see Overview of Capacity Manager Reports.

Capacity Chargeback and Billing

249

Utilization By Storage Tier

To access this report, in the Navigation pane select:
Capacity Manager > Chargeback and Billing > Utilization By Storage Tier

For additional details, refer to:

Capacity Chargeback and Billing for a list of storage arrays and default tier settings. Application Administrators Guide for details on configuring a Capacity Chargeback Policy.

The tier to which the array belongs. The tier implies the importance to your business. Storage Tier Tier 1. Used for business-critical data and I/O intensive applications. Tier 2. Used for important, but not business-critical data or low I/O intensive applications. Tier 3. Used for less critical data. The rate that was set in the chargeback policy. Total number of Hosts currently using storage. Total number of LUNs currently in use. The explicit amount of storage in use. Usage * Cost-per-GB = Total Cost

Cost Per GB # of Hosts # of LUNs Total SAN Storage Total Cost

For additional Capacity Manager information, see Overview of Capacity Manager Reports.

250

APTARE StorageConsole Report Users Guide

Utilization By Server Groups

To access this report, in the Navigation pane select:
Capacity Manager > Chargeback and Billing > Utilization By Server Groups

For additional details, refer to:

Capacity Chargeback and Billing for a list of storage arrays and default tier settings. Application Administrators Guide for details on configuring a Capacity Chargeback Policy. Note: When you run this report, be sure to select one or more Server Groups for the scope.

Group

Server Group The tier to which the array belongs. The tier implies the importance to your business.

Storage Tier

Tier 1. Used for business-critical data and I/O intensive applications. Tier 2. Used for important, but not business-critical data or low I/O intensive applications. Tier 3. Used for less critical data. Total number of Hosts currently using storage. Total number of LUNs currently in use. The explicit amount of storage in use. The rate that was set in the chargeback policy. Usage * Cost-per-GB = Total Cost

# of Hosts # of LUNs Total SAN Storage Cost Per GB Total Cost

For additional Capacity Manager information, see Overview of Capacity Manager Reports.

Capacity Chargeback and Billing

251

LUNs At Risk
Pro-actively increase LUN capacity and avoid outages or performance issues associated with insufficient capacity. To access this report, in the Navigation pane select:
Capacity Manager > Capacity At Risk > LUNs At Risk

When you generate this report, select a capacity threshold: Low, Warning, or Critical. Typically, for at risk reports, you will want to view the Critical LUNsthat is, those that are at risk of breaching the critical threshold and running out of space.
Note: When reviewing the values in this report, note that LUNs at risk are determined by evaluating current and projected usage.

Name Risk Date (Projected) Usage (Projected) High-Water Mark (Projected) Array Mount Point Raw File System

The specific logical unit number that is at risk of running out of room. Click on this link to access details in the LUN Utilization Summary. The date that the LUN is projected to exceed its threshold and will no longer be considered over-provisioned. Usage based on the period that youve selected. The projected high-water mark represents the maximum usage, based on the history for the reports selected period. Note that this size may represent temporary usage. The group to which this LUN belongs. The hosts file system mount point for this LUN. The explicit full directory path for the file system.

252

APTARE StorageConsole Report Users Guide

Host Storage Domain

The name of the host storage domain, a logical group of LUNs that can be accessed by multiple hosts through the same physical storage port, with each host accessing its unique LUN. For security purposes, LUN masking is also coupled with this capability. Note: Host storage domain is Hitachis name for its multi-hosted storage capability.

Volume Group Current Usage Host Name Capacity

The logical collection or volume group to which the volume belongs. The amount of storage already committed. Click on a host name to launch the Host Utilization Detail. The total capacity (used and unused) of the LUN. A LUN is determined to be at risk when this tolerance threshold is crossed. The default thresholds are set at: Low = 30% Warning = 70% Critical = 90% To modify thresholds for a particular LUN, go to the Portals Admin toolbar: Admin > Threshold Policies For additional details, see Adding/Editing a Threshold Policy in the Application Administrators Guide.

Threshold

For additional Capacity Manager information, see Overview of Capacity Manager Reports.

LUNs At Risk

253

Over-Provisioned LUNs
To access this report, in the Navigation pane select:
Capacity Manager > Capacity At Risk > Over Provisioned LUNs

If youve over-provisioned LUNs, you really want to know. Over-provisioning leads to increased costs unless you reclaim the space. When you execute this report, you can select the Threshold for the list that will be displayed. Typically, youll be interested in the Low or Warning thresholds. Since this report shows over-provisioning, the list will show usage that has not reached the threshold.

Name As of High-Water Mark (Projected) Host Name Capacity Array Mount Point Raw File System Host Storage Domain

The LUN number/ID. This date indicates when the LUN became over-provisioned. The projected high-water mark represents the maximum usage, based on the history for the reports selected period. Note that this size may represent temporary usage. Click on a host name to launch the Host Utilization Detail. The total capacity (used and unused) of the LUN. The array to which the LUN belongs. Location of the file system. Explicit disk location of the LUN. The name of the host storage domain, a logical group of LUNs that can be accessed by multiple hosts through the same physical storage port, with each host accessing its unique LUN. For security purposes, LUN masking is also coupled with this capability. A host storage domain is Hitachis name for multi-hosted storage capability. The logical collection or volume group to which the volume belongs.

Volume Group

254

APTARE StorageConsole Report Users Guide

Current Usage Threshold

Amount of storage currently used. A LUN is determined to be over-provisioned when the usage is under the threshold. The default thresholds are set at: Low = 30% Warning = 70% Critical = 90% To modify thresholds for a particular LUN, go to the Portals Admin toolbar: Admin > Threshold Policies For additional details, see Adding/Editing a Threshold Policy in the Application Administrators Guide.

For additional Capacity Manager information, see Overview of Capacity Manager Reports.

Over-Provisioned LUNs

255

Hosts at Risk
To access this report, in the Navigation pane select:
Capacity Manager > Capacity At Risk > Hosts At Risk

When you generate this report, select a capacity threshold: Low, Warning, or Critical. Typically, for at risk reports, you will want to view the Critical hoststhat is, those that are at risk of breaching the critical threshold. This report lists only the hosts that require your immediate attention. Use the host link to drill down to particulars.

Note: When reviewing the values in this report, note that hosts at risk are determined by evaluating current and projected usage. Host Name Risk Date (Projected) Usage (Projected) High-Water Mark (Projected) Capacity Click on a host name to access details in the Host Utilization Detail. The date that the host is projected to exceed its threshold and will no longer be considered over-provisioned. Projected usage associated with the risk date. The high-water mark represents the maximum usage for a period. Note that this size may represent temporary usage The hosts storage limit.

256

APTARE StorageConsole Report Users Guide

Current Usage

Storage already consumed. A host becomes at risk when this tolerance threshold is crossed. The default thresholds are set at: Low = 30% Warning = 70% Critical = 90% To modify thresholds for a particular host, go to the Portals Admin toolbar: Admin > Threshold Policies For additional details, see Adding/Editing a Threshold Policy in the Application Administrators Guide.

Threshold

For additional Capacity Manager information, see Overview of Capacity Manager Reports.

Hosts at Risk

257

Over-Provisioned Hosts
To access this report, in the Navigation pane select:
Capacity Manager > Capacity At Risk > Over Provisioned Hosts

By determining which hosts are over-provisioned, you can take steps to reclaim the space before committing resources to acquire additional storage. Over-provisioning leads to increased costs as a result of under-utilized storage. When you execute this report, you can select the Threshold for the list that will be displayed. Typically, youll be interested in the Low or Warning thresholds. Since this report shows over-provisioning, the list will show usage that has not reached the threshold.

Name As of (Projected) Usage (Projected) High-Water Mark (Projected) Capacity Current Usage

Click on a host name to access details in the Host Utilization Detail. This date indicates when the host became over-provisioned. Projected consumption by the host. High-Water Mark = Capacity * Threshold The hosts storage limit. Storage already consumed. A host becomes over-provisioned when the usage is under the threshold. The default thresholds are set at: Low = 30% Warning = 70% Critical = 90% To modify thresholds for a particular host, go to the Portals Admin toolbar: Admin > Threshold Policies For additional details, see Adding/Editing a Threshold Policy in the Application Administrators Guide.

Threshold

For additional Capacity Manager information, see Overview of Capacity Manager Reports.

258

APTARE StorageConsole Report Users Guide

APTARE StorageConsole Release Notes, v6.5

Chapter16

NetApp Capacity Reports

Capacity Manager provides insight into storage users, overconsumption, and underutilized storage. The data collected from NetApp storage is displayed in the reports described in this chapter.
This chapter covers the following topics: Array Capacity and Utilization (NetApp View) NetApp Storage System Detail NetApp LUN Utilization Summary NetApp Aggregate Summary NetApp Aggregate Detail NetApp Plex Details NetApp Volume Summary NetApp Volume Details NetApp NFS Summary NetApp CIFS Summary QTree Summary NetApp Snapshot Summary Array iSCSI Port Utilization NetApp Disk Summary NetApp Aggregates at Risk NetApp Volumes at Risk Thin Provisioning Overview

For additional Capacity Manager information, see Overview of Capacity Manager Reports.

259

Array Capacity and Utilization (NetApp View)

To access this report, in the Navigation pane select:
Capacity Manager > Storage Capacity & Utilization > Array Capacity & Utilization

Because NetApp utilizes a number of unique constructssuch as Aggregates and Volumesto organize and access its storage, additional data is available via drilldown links.

The report is organized into four columns:

1. NetApp Summary 2. Raw Capacity 3. Aggregate/Volume Capacity - Pools of available storage can be found in existing RAID groups. Even though storage may be 100% allocated at the array level, the RAID group utilization will reveal the amount of remaining, usable storage. 4. LUN Capacity

260

APTARE StorageConsole Report Users Guide

NetApp Summary
This section of the report provides a overview of the storage system, with links to relevant components.
Storage Array Model Status Product # FC Ports # iSCSI Ports # CIFS Share # NFS Export # Disks The name that you assigned to the array. Available values include all supported storage devices. For a list of supported devices, see the APTARE StorageConsole Certified Configurations Guide. The specific model of the NetApp storage. The current status of the storage. Mouse over this status to view details. The name of the product, typically shown as a series number. This field provides an indicator of capacity specifications, such as LUNs, hosts per array, and drives per array. Number of Fibre Channel ports Links to Array iSCSI Port Utilization. Links to NetApp CIFS Summary. Links to NetApp NFS Summary. Links to NetApp Disk Summary. The number of hosts that are sharing the capacity. This is the total number of unique hosts that have LUNs assigned by this storage array, and the hosts have been successfully queried using one or more host resource policies. If zero, host resources data has not been collected. Links to the LUN Utilization Summary. Percentage of the NetApp storage already utilized.

# Hosts

Host Usage % Used

For additional Capacity Manager information, see Overview of Capacity Manager Reports.

Array Capacity and Utilization (NetApp View)

261

Raw Capacity
This column of information summarizes capacity and usage. The percentages, in particular, capture the essence of your current utilization status.
Total raw capacity of the storage array. This sums all PDEVs (including sparesthat is, drives that are not allocated to an Aggregate). If the RAID state of the PDEV is partner or broken, the disk is not included in the raw capacity calculation. You can set the capacity units to be displayed, either GB or MB, by selecting the Advanced option when you generate the report. Total raw capacity of the logical unit numbers (LUNs) in the array that Allocated Size have been mapped to a host. These LUNs are typically configured as volumes on the host and dedicated to an application. Available Size Total raw capacity of the array that has not been carved into a RAID group. The size is displayed in the units you selected with the Advanced option when you generated the report. Expressed as a percentage, total capacity of the LUNs in the array that have not been assigned to a host and that are available for provisioning. This percentage is a better capacity indicator than the number shown as Available Size. Expressed as a percentage, total capacity that has been assigned to a host and that is not available for provisioning.

Capacity

% Available

Raw Usage

Aggregate/Volume Capacity
This column provides an overview of the aggregate (not for VFilers) and volume (for VFilers) capacity and utilization.
# Aggregates Aggr Capacity Aggr Used Aggr Available Aggr Usage # Total Volumes Links to the NetApp Aggregate Summary. The aggregates total size Amount of the aggregates capacity that is in use Available storage in the aggregate Used data storage at the physical layer Mouse over the thermometer bar to view the % available. The number of volumes defined for this NetApp unit Links to the NetApp Volume Summary. The number of thin provisioned volumes # Thin Prov Vols Includes volumes where the Space Guarantee value equals file or none. Total capacity for all associated volumes

Volume Capacity

262

APTARE StorageConsole Report Users Guide

Volume Used Volume Available Volume Usage

Total of used space for all the associated volumes Available capacity from all of the associated volumes Used data storage at the logical layer Mouse over the thermometer bar to view the % available.

LUN Capacity
The LUN fields enable drill-down access to additional details so that you can determine the capacity of each configured LUN.
# LUNs The number of LUNs that have been created on the array. Click on the Used link or the LUN link to go to the LUN Utilization Summary.

Total LUN Capacity Total storage capacity for all of the associated LUNs The number of LUNs on the array that have been mapped to a host. These LUNs are typically configured as volumes on the host and dedicated to an application. For NetApp, these are the LUNs associated with an iGroup. Click on the Allocated LUNs link or the LUN link to go to the LUN Utilization Summary. AllocLUN Capacity The total storage capacity for the allocated LUNs

# Allocated LUNs

# UnAllocated LUNs The number of LUNs that have yet to be allocated UnAllocated LUN Capacity LUN Usage The available LUN capacity % of LUN capacity that is currently in use

Array Capacity and Utilization (NetApp View)

263

NetApp Storage System Detail

To access this report, in the Navigation pane select:
Capacity Manager > Storage Capacity & Utilization > Array Capacity & Utilization

Then, click the Array Name link.

Current Configuration
Name IP Address ONTAP Version Domain Name Name of the NetApp storage IP address of the storage unit Version of the NetApp ONTAP operating system The DNS domain name

264

APTARE StorageConsole Report Users Guide

Auth Type

Indicates the type of authentication: ad - Active Directory nt4 - Windows NT4 workgroup - Workgroup passwd - Password file, NIS, or LDAP NTFS or Multiprotocol Server name Windows software version Last time the portal database was updated with data collected from the NetApp system

Security Style Server Name Windows Type Last Updated

Aggregate Utilization
Aggregate Utilization The thermometers and capacity information provide a sub-set of the information that is available in the NetApp Aggregate Summary. Drill down on the Top 3 of n Aggregate Utilization to see additional aggregates. Name Usage Total Capacity Allocated Size Available Size

Volume Utilization
Volume Utilization The thermometers and capacity information provide a sub-set of the information that is available in the NetApp Volume Summary. Drill down on the Top 3 of n Volume Utilization to see additional volumes. Name Usage Total Capacity Allocated Size Available Size

Capacity Usage Bar Charts

Capacity Usage Bar Charts A cascade of bar charts represents usage by: Array - Displays total capacity, the amount used by system overhead, and spare capacity. Aggregate - Of the total capacity, what is used by the aggregate Volume - Volume usage, including specific snapshot details LUN/Shares/QTrees

NetApp Storage System Detail

265

NetApp LUN Utilization Summary

This NetApp-specific report can be accessed via a LUN link in NetApp-specific reports, such as the NetApp Volume Summary report. A similar report is available for all storage arrays in your environment. See LUN Utilization Summary. Using the LUN Utilization Summary, you can view all the mapping details, such as mount points and file systems.

Name Raid Type Aggregate Volume QTree Storage Array Capacity Estimated Used Estimated Available

The name of the LUN. The RAID level on the LUN. When the RAID type indicates Disk, there is no RAID protection. Links to the NetApp Aggregate Summary. Links to the NetApp Volume Summary. Name of the QTree to which this LUN belongs. Links to the QTree Summary. Links to the NetApp Storage System Detail. The total capacity (used and unused) of the LUN. LUN estimated used. See Estimated LUN Usage/Availability. Amount of LUN estimated to be available

266

APTARE StorageConsole Report Users Guide

Mount Point

The amount of storage used by each mount point. These values are displayed when a LUN is expanded to view mount point details. The name of the host to which the LUN was allocated. Click on a host link to launch the Host Utilization Detail. The hosts file system mount point for this LUN. Note: Its possible to have zero mount points and file systems, in the scenario where a LUN has been allocated to the host, but the host has not yet made use of it by creating a file system and mounting it.

Host Mount Point

File System Volume Group iGroup Host Storage Domain

The hosts file system or drive name to which the LUN maps. LUNs simply appear as disks to hosts. The logical collection or volume group to which the volume belongs. Initiator Group name for NetApp storage; a LUN is mapped to an iGroupa method of LUN masking. The name of the host storage domain, a logical group of LUNs that can be accessed by multiple hosts through the same physical storage port, with each host accessing its unique LUN. For security purposes, LUN masking is also coupled with this capability. Note: A host storage domain is Hitachis name for multi-hosted storage capability.

Array Port WWN Last Updated iSCSI Interface Space Reserved

The unique identifier, World Wide Name, of the array port address. Last LUN update The iGroup contains an iSCSI qualified name that maps to a LUN. (NetApp only) Indicates if LUN space reservation is enabled

NetApp LUN Utilization Summary

267

NetApp Aggregate Summary

To access this report, in the Navigation pane select:
Capacity Manager > Storage Capacity & Utilization > NetApp Aggregate Summary

or
Capacity Manager > Storage Capacity & Utilization > Array Capacity & Utilization

Then, click # Aggregates. View this report for an overview of how your aggregates are configured to manage disks, RAID groups, and plexes. The Aggregate Utilization Summary displays one row for each aggregate, with links to Volume and Plex details.
Note: If the aggregate is mirrored, two Plexes will be listed.

Aggregate Storage Array Usage Total Capacity Allocated Size Available Size RAID Type # Volumes # of Thin Prov Vols List of Plexes

The Aggregate number/ID The NetApp system with which the aggregate is associated Mouse over the usage thermometer to view the % available The aggregates total capacity Amount of capacity that has been allocated for use Remaining capacity available for use raid0 (mirrored), raid4 (single disk for parity), or raid_dp (doubleparity protection) Links to the NetApp Volume Summary Number of thin provisioned volumes Lists 1 or 2 Plexes2 if SyncMirror is licensed and enabled. Links to the NetApp Plex Details report.

For additional Capacity Manager information, see Overview of Capacity Manager Reports.

268

APTARE StorageConsole Report Users Guide

NetApp Aggregate Detail

To access this report, in the Navigation pane select:
Capacity Manager > Storage Capacity & Utilization > Array Capacity & Utilization

Then, click # Aggregates. Then, click an Aggregate Name link. The Aggregate Detail forecasts usage, based on historical data. Mouse over the Volume and Aggregate symbols to view the historical and projected usage.

Aggregate Capacity Usage

At the bottom of the window, the cascade of usage bars illustrates the logical subsets of the aggregate.
Mouse over the colored bar segments to view the actual values instead of the percentages.

NetApp Aggregate Detail

269

NetApp Plex Details

To access this report, in the Navigation pane select:
Capacity Manager > Storage Capacity & Utilization > Array Capacity & Utilization

Then, click # Aggregates.

Note: The # of Aggregates is not listed for a VFiler, as it is not relevant.

Then, in the Aggregate Utilization Summary, click a Plex link. This drilldown sequence launches the Plex Details report, which displays a list of details for each of the disks in the Plexs disk pool. Use this report to understand how the RAID groups and disks are organized and configured.

RAID Reconstruction Status:

Name Is Reconstructing? Name of the Plex Y or N During RAID reconstruction, as a result of a disk failure, redundant data is read from other disks to recreate the blocks from the failed disk. If reconstruction is in progress, this value shows the completion percentage.

Reconstruction %

Plex Disk Pool Details:

Name Storage Array Aggregate Disk Type Capacity Vendor The Disk name NetApp storage system namelinks to the NetApp Storage System Detail The Aggregate associated with the volumelinks to the NetApp Aggregate Detail Disk Type: ATA, EATA, FCAL, LUN, SAS, SATA, SCSI, XATA, XSAS, or unknown. The Disks total capacity Disk Vendor

270

APTARE StorageConsole Report Users Guide

Disk Model RAID State RAID Type RAID Status

Disk Model RAID state: broken, copy, partner, pending, present, reconstructing, spare, or zeroing RAID type: pending, parity, dparity, or data Possible status: copying, degraded, foreign, growing, initializing, invalid, ironing, mirror degraded, mirrored, needs check, noparity, normal, out-of-date, partial, raid0, raid4, raid_dp, reconstruct, resyncing, snapmirrored, verifying, unrecoverable Disk serial number The RAID group to which the disk belongs

Serial # RAID Group

Firmware Revision Disk firmware revision number

NetApp Plex Details

271

NetApp Volume Summary

To access this report, in the Navigation pane select:
Capacity Manager > Storage Capacity & Utilization > NetApp Volume Summary

or
Capacity Manager > Storage Capacity & Utilization > Array Capacity & Utilization

Then, click # Volumes.

Each volume depends on its aggregate for its physical storage. Both Traditional and FlexVol volumes contain directories and files; they also can contain QTrees and LUNs.

Volume Storage Array Aggr Pct Usage Space Guarantee Type RAID Type Usage Total Capacity

Name of the volume Links to the NetApp Volume Details. The name of the NetApp physical storage for the volume The name of the associated aggregate Percentage of the aggregate that is in use The type of space that has been committed: volume, file, or none. Note that file or none indicates thin provisioning. Flex for flexible volumes, Trad for traditional volumes raid0 (mirrored), raid4 (single disk for parity), or raid_dp (double-parity protection) Mouse over the thermometer to view the volumes % available The volumes total capacity. If the volume is offline or restricted, 0 is displayed.

272

APTARE StorageConsole Report Users Guide

Allocated Size Available Size # QTrees # LUNs # Shares # Exports # Snapshots

Amount of volume space in use. If the volume is offline or restricted, 0 is displayed. Amount of space available on the volume. If the volume is offline or restricted, 0 is displayed. Links to the QTree Summary. Links to the LUN Utilization Summary. The number of CIFS shares using this volumelinks to the NetApp CIFS Summary. The number of NFS exports using this volumelinks to the NetApp NFS Summary. The number of snapshots using this volume. Links to the NetApp Snapshot Summary.

For additional Capacity Manager information, see Overview of Capacity Manager Reports.

NetApp Volume Summary

273

NetApp Volume Details

To access this report, in the Navigation pane select:
Capacity Manager > Storage Capacity & Utilization > NetApp Volume Summary

Then, click Volume Name.

274

APTARE StorageConsole Report Users Guide

Volume Summary Status

Volume Storage Array Aggr Pct Usage Space Guarantee Type RAID Type Usage Total Capacity Allocated Size Available Size # QTrees # LUNs # Shares # Exports # Snapshots Name of the volume Links to the NetApp Volume Details. The name of the NetApp physical storage for the volume The name of the associated aggregate Percentage of the aggregate that is in use The type of space that has been committed: volume, file, or none. Note that file or none indicates thin provisioning. Flex for flexible volumes, Trad for traditional volumes raid0 (mirrored), raid4 (single disk for parity), or raid_dp (double-parity protection) Mouse over the thermometer to view the volumes % available The volumes total capacity. If the volume is offline or restricted, 0 is displayed. Amount of volume space in use. If the volume is offline or restricted, 0 is displayed. Amount of space available on the volume. If the volume is offline or restricted, 0 is displayed. Links to the QTree Summary. Links to the LUN Utilization Summary. The number of CIFS shares using this volumelinks to the NetApp CIFS Summary. The number of NFS exports using this volumelinks to the NetApp NFS Summary. The number of snapshots using this volume. Links to the NetApp Snapshot Summary.

Quota Status
Status Sub-Status Indicates if quotas are enabled: yes or no Minor quota status for the volume, valid only when the status is either resizing or initializing. The sub-status could be: scanning, etc scanning, setup, queue scan, done, or none. If blank, there were no errors. Otherwise, this field displays the last quota error message. If blank, there were no errors. Otherwise, this field displays the collection of quota errors, including the reason code.

Reason Quota Errors

NetApp Volume Details

275

Snapshot Schedule Details

This section displays the volumes current snapshot schedule.
Days Hours Minutes Weeks Which Hours Which Minutes Number of daily snapshots taken Number of hourly snapshots taken Number of snapshots taken each minute Number of weekly snapshots taken A list of hours when the hourly snapshots are taken A list of minutes when the by-minutes snapshots are taken

Quota Details
Quota Type Quota Target Tree Disk Used Hard Disk Limit Soft Disk Limit Threshold File Used Hard File Limit Soft File Limit User, group, or tree Name, number, or path namerelevant to the quota type Name of the QTree for this quota Current amount of disk space - indicates unlimited The amount of disk space reserved for the target- indicates unlimited. Both an SNMP trap and a log message are generated when the target exceeds this limit- indicates unlimited. When the target exceeds this amount of disk space, a message is logged Current number of files used by the quota target Number of files allowed for the target Both an SNMP trap and a log message are generated when the target exceeds this limit - indicates unlimited.

Quota User Name Name of the User, Group, or SID (Windows security ID)

276

APTARE StorageConsole Report Users Guide

NetApp NFS Summary

To access this report, in the Navigation pane select:
Capacity Manager > Storage Capacity & Utilization > NetApp NFS Summary

or
Capacity Manager > Storage Capacity & Utilization > Array Capacity & Utilization

Then, click a # NFS Exports link. NetApp volumes that are exported via the NFS protocol are listed in this report. Using this report, you can identify who is using the NFS shares.

Path Name Volume QTree Storage Array Host Type Root Host Name Host Total Capacity Used Capacity Free Capacity

The pathname of the file Name of the volume, which links to the NetApp Volume Details. Name of the associated QTree Link to the NetApp Storage System Detail. Host NFS permission type: read-only, read-write, root The name of the root host IP address or host name of the host to which the file system is exported Total capacity associated with the path and volume Amount of capacity that is used by NFS clients Available capacity for NFS client use

Host Mount Point The mount point of the host that is using the volume

For additional Capacity Manager information, see Overview of Capacity Manager Reports.

NetApp NFS Summary

277

NetApp CIFS Summary

To access this report, in the Navigation pane select:
Capacity Manager > Storage Capacity & Utilization > NetApp CIFS Summary

or
Capacity Manager > Storage Capacity & Utilization > Array Capacity & Utilization

Then, click # CIFS Shares. View the volumes that have been exported to Windows hosts through CIFS (Common Internet File System) shares. This report displays the usage of each share.

Name Mount Point Max User Is Volume Offline Force Group Volume QTree Storage Array Description Host Name Total Capacity Used Capacity Free Capacity

Directory name of the share Mount point of the share The maximum number of simultaneous connections to the share0 indicates no limit Indicates if the volume is offlineYes or No This group overrides the group of the files owner, so if this field is blank, it defaults to the file owners group. Name of the volume links to the NetApp Volume Summary. Name of the associated QTree links to the QTree Summary Links to the NetApp Storage System Detail. Description of the share Name of the host that is using the volume Total size of the share Amount of storage used by the share Available capacity

Host Mount Point The home directory of the host that is using the volume

For additional Capacity Manager information, see Overview of Capacity Manager Reports.

278

APTARE StorageConsole Report Users Guide

QTree Summary
To access this report, in the Navigation pane select:
Capacity Manager > Storage Capacity & Utilization > NetApp QTree Summary

A QTree is the mechanism used to partition a volume, enabling the management of storage by project, user, or group. Use this QTree Summary to view the quota management configurations for the QTrees within a storage system. Then, drill down to view how each volume is partitioned.

Qtree Storage Array ID Oplocks Security Style Status Volume Aggregate # of LUNs # of Shares # of Exports

Name of the QTree, or if the ID is 0, the name of the volume is displayed Name of the associated NetApp storage system ID of the QTree, which is unique within a volume. An ID of 0 indicates the volume itself. Indicates if CIFS (Common Internet File System) opportunistic locks are enabled/disabled. UNIX, NTFS, or mixed SnapMirror backup status: Normal, Snapvaulted, Snapmirrored, or Readonly (if a SnapMirror destination) Name of the volume to which the QTree belongs. Links to the NetApp Volume Summary. Name of the aggregate to which the QTree belongs.Links to the NetApp Aggregate Summary. The number of LUNs mapped to the QTree. To view the specific LUN information, see the LUN Utilization Summary. The number of CIFS shares using this volumelinks to NetApp CIFS Summary The number of NFS exports using this volumelinks to NetApp NFS Summary

For additional Capacity Manager information, see Overview of Capacity Manager Reports.

QTree Summary

279

NetApp Snapshot Summary

To access this report, in the Navigation pane select:
Capacity Manager > Storage Capacity & Utilization > NetApp Snapshot Summary

NetApp snapshots use pointers to reference the blocks where the data is stored, thereby using a minimal amount of capacity. A snapshot captures a point-in-time image of the file system data. When the next snapshot is taken, the pointers will reference other blocks, as the file system data blocks have changed in the interval between snapshots. Therefore, the access time provides the time reference for the snapshot block usage. Snapshots provide a read-only source of data for backups to tape.

Name Storage Array Volume Access Time Total Blocks Cumulative Blocks Dependency Busy Cumulative % of Used Blocks Used Blocks Cumulative % of Total Blocks % of Total Blocks

Name of the snapshot schedule Links to the NetApp Storage System Detail Links to the NetApp Volume Details Time the snapshot was created. This value does not change when the snapshot is accessed. Number of 1024-byte blocks in this snapshot Number of 1024-byte blockscumulative for current and previous snapshots Lists the applications that depend on this snapshot: snapmirror, snapvault, dump, vclone, LUNs, or snaplock Indicates if an application is using the snapshot The % of blocks used by this snapshot and all recent snapshots Of all the blocks used on the volume, this is the % used by the snapshot The % of blocks owned by this snapshot and all recent snapshots The % of all the volumes blocks that is owned by this snapshot

For additional Capacity Manager information, see Overview of Capacity Manager Reports.

280

APTARE StorageConsole Report Users Guide

Array iSCSI Port Utilization

To access this report, in the Navigation pane select:
Capacity Manager > Storage Capacity & Utilization > Array Capacity & Utilization

Then, click a # iSCSI Ports link.

Array Name iSCSI Interface Target Portal Name Target Group Tag

The NetApp storage system Name of the interface Name of the target portal group that coordinates the iSCSI session with this NetApp system Numeric ID of the disk storage target with which the portal group is associated (TPGT - target portal group tag). iSCSI portal groups that are associated with target nodes have a target group tag ranging from 0 to 65535. IP address or host name of the client initiator that is accessing the storage via the iSCSI port Identifies the hosts connection to the storage target Mount point path File system path File system type Total capacity available Amount of capacity in use

Host Host iSCSI Name Mount Point File System File System Type Capacity Used

Array iSCSI Port Utilization

281

NetApp Disk Summary

To access this report, in the Navigation pane select:
Capacity Manager > Storage Capacity & Utilization > NetApp Disk Summary

Using the Report Designer, you can filter the output of this report using the following parameter selections:
Storage Array RAID State Disk Type

Name Storage Array Aggregate Disk Type Capacity Vendor Disk Model RAID State RAID Type RAID Status

The Disk name The name of the NetApp storage system The name of the associated aggregate, with a link to the NetApp Aggregate Detail. Disk Type: ATA, EATA, FCAL, LUN, SAS, SATA, SCSI, XATA, XSAS, or unknown. The Disks total capacity Disk Vendor Disk Model RAID state: broken, copy, partner, pending, present, reconstructing, spare, or zeroing RAID type: pending, parity, dparity, or data Possible status: copying, degraded, foreign, growing, initializing, invalid, ironing, mirror degraded, mirrored, needs check, noparity, normal, out-of-date, partial, raid0, raid4, raid_dp, reconstruct, resyncing, snapmirrored, verifying, unrecoverable Disk serial number The RAID group to which the disk belongs

Serial # RAID Group

Firmware Revision Disk firmware revision number

For additional Capacity Manager information, see Overview of Capacity Manager Reports.

282

APTARE StorageConsole Report Users Guide

NetApp Aggregates at Risk

To access this report, in the Navigation pane select:
Capacity Manager > Storage Capacity & Utilization > NetApp Aggregates at Risk

For thin provisioning, its important to know when host usage is about to exceed the storage that was promised. The details shown in this aggregate report can help you understand the current physical capacity status. When an aggregate is at riskthe amount of used storage in the flexvol approaches the aggregates capacityit can be resized to add physical disk space to the aggregate. See also, Thin Provisioning Overview.

Note: The Total Capacity value represents the amount of storage that has been committed or promised to hosts.

When you generate this report, you can select the threshold to report: Low, Warning, or Critical.
Aggregate Storage Array Usage Total Capacity The Aggregate number/ID link to NetApp Aggregate Detail The NetApp system with which the aggregate is associated, which drills down to NetApp Storage System Detail Mouse over the usage thermometer to view the % available The aggregates total capacity

Allocated Capacity Amount of capacity that has been allocated for use Available Capacity Remaining capacity available for use RAID Type # Volumes at Risk # of Hosts at Risk List of Plexes Risk Date raid0 (mirrored), raid4 (single disk for parity), or raid_dp (doubleparity protection) Links to the NetApp Volumes at Risk Links to the NetApp Volumes at Risk Lists 1 or 2 Plexes2 if SyncMirror is licensed and enabled. Links to the NetApp Plex Details report. The point at which the aggregate is at risk

For additional Capacity Manager information, see Overview of Capacity Manager Reports.

NetApp Aggregates at Risk

283

NetApp Volumes at Risk

To access this report, in the Navigation pane select:
Capacity Manager > Storage Capacity & Utilization > NetApp Volumes at Risk

When you configure thin provisioning, you enable multiple volumes to access the same pool of free storage. Since thin provisioning commits more storage to hosts than is actually available, it is important to identify the remaining, usable storage and the point at which the aggregate is at risk of not having available storage. See also, Thin Provisioning Overview.

When you generate this report, you can select the threshold to report: Low, Warning, or Critical.

Volume Storage Array Aggregate Aggregate Risk Date Space Guarantee Usage Total Capacity

Volume name link to NetApp Volume Details The name of the NetApp storage system, which links to NetApp Storage System Detail The name of the associated aggregate, with a link to the NetApp Aggregate Detail. The date at which the aggregate is expected to not have storage available for use The type of space that has been committed: volume, file, or none. Note that file or none indicates thin provisioning. Mouse over the thermometer to see the % available. Total capacity of the volume

Allocated Capacity Amount of the volumes capacity that has been allocated

284

APTARE StorageConsole Report Users Guide

Available Capacity Amount of the volumes capacity that is available Host Name Host Usage Mount Points Host Capacity Estimate Used The host that is at risk of consuming more than the space guaranteed to it. Mouse over the thermometer bar to view the estimated % used by the host. The hosts mount points that are using the storage The capacity of the host Estimated amount of storage used by the host

Estimate Available Estimated storage available for host consumption

For additional Capacity Manager information, see Overview of Capacity Manager Reports.

Thin Provisioning Overview

By using an over-subscription strategy, thin provisioning technology addresses the issue of inefficient storage utilization. Applications are given physical space from a storage pool when data is written to the application, avoiding the pre-allocation commitment required by traditional storage provisioning approaches. In this way, an application can appear to have more storage than is actually reserved for it. As the applications data grows, it can be given more storage from the storage pool, with minimal management intervention. With thin provisioning, existing capacity can be more efficiently used, eliminating the need for over-provisioning and often delaying the acquisition of additional storage. Of course, given the fact that storage is over-promised and then actually dealt out as needed, it is incumbent upon the Storage Administrator to monitor storage usage so that an applications write requests can be fulfilled without failures. StorageConsole provides the following key NetApp reports to facilitate this monitoring process:
NetApp Aggregates at Risk NetApp Volumes at Risk

Thin Provisioning Overview

285

286

APTARE StorageConsole Report Users Guide

APTARE StorageConsole Release Notes, v6.5

Chapter16

IBM Arrays - Capacity Reports

This chapter covers the following topics: Overview of IBM Array Support Array Capacity & Utilization (IBM Enterprise Array View) IBM Array Site Summary IBM Array Summary IBM Array Detail IBM Rank Summary IBM Extent Pool Summary IBM Disk Summary

287

Overview of IBM Array Support

APTARE StorageConsole supports data collection and reporting on the following LSIbased arrays. The LSI-based arrays include IBM DS/ESS and Sun StorageTek series, as well as SGI InfiniteStorage and Teradata Storage Systems.
IBM Arrays Storage System DS3300 Storage System DS3400 Storage System DS4700 Express Model 70 Storage System DS4700 Express Model 72 Storage System DS4800 Model 80

Sun Arrays Sun StorageTek 2510 Sun StorageTek 2540 Sun StorageTek 6140 Sun StorageTek 6140

LSI LSI 1532 LSI 1932 LSI 3992 LSI 3992 LSI 6998 LSI 6998 LSI 7900

Sun StorageTek 6540 Storage System DS4800 Model 88 Sun StorageTek 6540 Storage System DS5000 Series Sun StorageTek 6780

288

APTARE StorageConsole Report Users Guide

Array Capacity & Utilization (IBM Enterprise Array View)

The following illustration represents an example of the view available for IBM Enterprise Arrays (6K/8K). For a description of the fields displayed, see IBM Array Detail.

Array Capacity & Utilization (IBM Enterprise Array View)

289

IBM Array Site Summary

To access this report, in the Navigation pane select:
Capacity Manager > Storage Capacity & Utilization > IBM Array Site Summary

Four or eight disk drive modules comprise an Array Site. Then, one or two Array Sites comprise an Array. An Array is an Array Site that has been formatted to a specific RAID format.

Understanding IBM Enterprise Storage Capacity Calculations

Capacity values for IBM arrays may appear different from what is reported by the IBM CLI or IBM Tools, as IBM uses a decimal gigabyte10^9 bytes, while StorageConsole uses 1024 for a KB when converting to GB. For FB open systems host, an extent is 1 GB. For CKD IBM zSeries or S/390 systems, an extent is 1 cylinder (.92 GB).

In the Report Designer, you can narrow the report output by selecting values for the following criteria:
State: Assigned, Unassigned, Unavailable Disk Classes: ENT, NL Array Site Storage Array The Array Site ID The physical storage system; Drill down to the IBM Array Detail. Device adapter pair numberthe physical I/O enclosure location If the DA Pair is an even number, it indicates the first DA pair in the enclosure; an odd number indicates the second DA pair in the enclosure The capacity of all disks belonging to the Array Site Number of disks associated with this Array Site. Links to the IBM Disk Summary. Links to the IBM Array Summary.

DA Pair

Capacity # of Disks Array Name

290

APTARE StorageConsole Report Users Guide

Disk RPM

The disk revolutions per minute, such as 10000 or 15000 assigned, unassigned, unavailable, initializing Indicates if the array site is assigned to the array. If the state is unavailable, its capacity is not included in the total array capacity calculation, as shown in the Array Capacity and Utilization report. Enterprise fibre channel drives (ENT) or Nearline ATA drives (NL)

State

Disk Class

IBM Array Site Summary

291

IBM Array Summary

To access this report, in the Navigation pane select:
Capacity Manager > Storage Capacity & Utilization > IBM Array Summary

Understanding IBM Enterprise Storage Capacity Calculations

In the Report Designer, you can narrow the report output by selecting values for the following criteria:
State: Assigned, Unassigned, Unavailable RAID Types: 5, 6, 10 Disk Classes: ENT, NL

Array Storage Array Data State RAID Type # of Array Sites Rank

The Array ID. An Array (also known as a RAID Array) is an Array Site that has been formatted to a specific RAID format. The physical storage array system assigned, unassigned, unavailable Indicates if the data is assigned to a Rank. RAID 5, 6, or 10 Drill down to the IBM Array Site Summary for details. An array can have 1 or 2 array sites. Drill down to the IBM Rank Summary. Device adapter pair numberthe physical I/O enclosure location If the DA Pair is an even number, it indicates the first DA pair in the enclosure; an odd number indicates the second DA pair in the enclosure

DA Pair

292

APTARE StorageConsole Report Users Guide

Capacity Disk Class

The capacity of the Array (also known as the RAID Array)one or more Array Sites can comprise an array and the capacity shown is the total for all the Array Sites in the array. Enterprise fibre channel drives (ENT) or Nearline ATA drives (NL)

IBM Array Summary

293

IBM Array Detail

This report is accessed via a link from other IBM Array reports.

Understanding IBM Enterprise Storage Capacity Calculations

IBM Storage Unit Summary

Storage Unit Storage Image Model State Product # FC Ports # Disks Array Site Used The Storage Unit ID contains the manufacturer, machine type, and serial number The Storage Image ID contains the manufacturer, machine type, and serial number The storage unit model State of the storage unit: online, offline, resuming, quiescing, quiesce exception, forced quiescing, fenced, discovery IBM Number of Fibre Channel ports; links to the Array Port Utilization report Links to the IBM Disk Summary Amount of array storage used by the Array Site

294

APTARE StorageConsole Report Users Guide

# of Hosts Host Usage

Number of hosts mapped to this array; links to the Host Capacity & Utilization Amount of capacity used by hosts

Raw Capacity
Capacity Allocated Size Available Size Total array capacity Amount of capacity that has been allocated Amount of capacity that is free

Raw Capacity Usage Mouse over the thermometer to view the usage percentage

Array Site Capacity

# of Array Sites Array Site Capacity Array Site Used Array Site Available Array Site Usage The number of array sites to which this array belongs; links to the IBM Array Site Summary Sum of the capacity of all the associated array sites, derived from the capacity of the disks in each array site Sum of the array site capacity that is in usedthat is, assigned to an array Array Site storage that has not been allocatedthat is, unassigned to an array Mouse over the thermometer to view the usage percentage

Array Capacity
# of Arrays Array Capacity Array Used Array Available Array Usage Links to the IBM Array Summary The capacity of the Array (also known as the RAID Array)one or more Array Sites can comprise an array and the capacity shown is the total for all the Array Sites in the array. If an array is assigned to a rank, it is used Array capacity that is not part of a rank is available Mouse over the thermometer to view the usage percentage.

Rank Capacity
# of Ranks Total Capacity Used Capacity The number of ranks links to the IBM Rank Summary Sum of the capacity of all ranks Capacity assigned to an extent pool

IBM Array Detail

295

Available Capacity Rank Usage

Capacity not assigned to an extent pool Mouse over the thermometer to view the percentage of the ranks that have been allocated.

Extent Pool Capacity

# of Extent Pools FB Extent Pool Capacity FB Extent Pool Used FB Extent Pool Available FB Extent Pool Usage CKD Extent Pool Capacity CKD Extent Pool Used CKD Extent Pool Available CKD Extent Pool Usage Links to the IBM Extent Pool Summary For FB, an extent is 1 GB. The sum of the capacity of all the fixed block extents in the extent pool The amount of fixed block extent pool storage in assigned to a logical volume The fixed block extent pool storage that is not assigned to a logical volume Mouse over the thermometer to view the percentage of the fixed block extent pool that is allocated. For CKD, an extent is 1 cylinder (.92 GB). The sum of the capacity of all the CKD extents in the extent pool The amount of the CKD extent pool storage in assigned to a logical volume The CKD extent pool storage that is not assigned to a logical volume Mouse over the thermometer to view the percentage of the CKD extent pool that is allocated.

296

APTARE StorageConsole Report Users Guide

Logical Volumes
This section provides the LUN mapping for determining capacity and usage.
# of FB Volumes Total FB Capacity # of Allocated FB FB Allocated Capacity # of Unallocated FB FB Unallocated Capacity # of CKD CKD Capacity Links to the LUN Utilization Summary Sum of the capacity of all the fixed block volumes for this array Links to the LUN Utilization Summary showing a list of allocated LUNs Sum of all the fixed block volume capacity that has been allocated The number of unallocated fixed block volumes The fixed block capacity that is not in allocated Number of CKD volumes Sum of the capacity of all the CKD volumes for this array

Top 3 of n Ranks
Click on the link to view the complete list of Ranks.
Name Usage Total Extents Rank name links to the IBM Rank Summary Used Extents in the Rank Total Extents in the Rank Extents in this Rank that are available for allocation in the Extent Pools Available If the available amount equals the total amount, it indicates that the rank is not allocated to any Extent Pools.

Top 3 of n Extent Pools

Click on the link to view the complete list of Extent Pools. Either 1 or 2 Ranks can comprise an Extent Pool. When it is a 1-to-1 relationship, the Extent Pool capacity values will look identical to the Rank values. Otherwise, they will be double the Rank values. All Ranks in an Extent Pool are of the same RAID type.
Name Usage Total Extents Available Extent Pool name links to the IBM Extent Pool Summary Amount of Extent capacity that is in use Total Extent capacity Available Extent capacity

IBM Array Detail

297

IBM Storage System Capacity Detail

Mouse over the bars to view the capacity totals in GB.

IBM Storage System FB Volumes

A pie chart represents fixed block volumes:
Ungrouped Unmapped Mapped

Mouse over the pie segments to view percentages.

Capacity and Object Usage Forecast

Graphs represent forecasted usage for the following objects:
Array Sites Arrays Extent Pools Ranks

298

APTARE StorageConsole Report Users Guide

IBM Rank Summary

To access this report, in the Navigation pane select:
Capacity Manager > Storage Capacity & Utilization > IBM Rank Summary

An IBM Rank is logical storage, enabling storage provisioning that is not constrained by the size of an array. One or more arrays comprise an IBM Rank, forming logically contiguous storage. Note that IBM often refers to Arrays as RAID Arrays.

Understanding IBM Enterprise Storage Capacity Calculations

In the Report Designer, you can narrow the report output by selecting values for the following criteria:
State: Normal, Configuring, Unassigned, Reserved, Deconfiguring, Depopulating, Configuration Error, Deconfiguration Error RAID Types: 5, 6, 10 Storage Types: fb, ckd

Rank Storage System

The name of the group of arrays The physical storage system on which the rank resides

IBM Rank Summary

299

State

The Configuration State: Normal, Configuring, Unassigned, Reserved, Deconfiguring, Depopulating, Configuration Error, Deconfiguration Error A rank remains in an unassigned state until it is assigned to an Extent Pool. Normal - If no other data state issues, it is Normal. Note that an unassigned array will have a Normal data state. Degraded - A disk drive module in the array may be rebuilding. Read Only - Possible issues: one or more disk drive modules have failed; there arent enough spares available for rebuilding; data loss could occur if writes continue without redundancy. Failed - Possible causes: Two or more disk drive modules have failed; disk drive modules arent available for rebuilding data. Repairing - Array repair could be accepted, but not yet complete Inaccessible - The storage image cant access all the data on the array. The Rank Group is either 0 or 1, corresponding to the Extent Pool ID. RAID 5, 6, or 10 Fixed block (FB) or Count-Key-Data (CKD) The ranks total capacity; the capacity is derived from the number of extents Amount of storage used by the rank Amount of the ranks storage that is available for use The total number of extents, striped across the disks in the array The number of partitions/extents that are in use. The number of extents available for use The arrays that comprise the Rank. An Array (also known as a RAID Array) is an Array Site that has been formatted to a specific RAID format. 1 or more Array Sites comprise an Array, from which the Rank is configured Links to the IBM Extent Pool Summary

Data State

Group Raid Type Storage Type Total Capacity Used Capacity Available Capacity Total Extents Used Extents Available Extents Array # of Array Sites Extent Pool Name

300

APTARE StorageConsole Report Users Guide

IBM Extent Pool Summary

To access this report, in the Navigation pane select:
Capacity Manager > Storage Capacity & Utilization > IBM Extent Pool Summary

Understanding IBM Enterprise Storage Capacity Calculations

In the Report Designer, you can narrow the report output by selecting values for the following criteria:
Storage Types: fb, ckd Rank Status: below, exceeded, full Name Storage System Rank Group Storage Type Extent Pool name The physical storage system (storage array) on which the extent pool resides A rank can only be assigned to one extent pool, but more than one rank can reside in an extent pool. Fixed block (FB) or Count-Key-Data (CKD) For FB, an extent is 1 GB. For CKD, an extent is 1 cylinder (.92 GB). Rank Status: Status below - % of available extents is less than threshold exceeded - % of available extents is greater than threshold full - 0 extents are available Sum of the capacity of all extents in this pool The amount of space in this extent pool that is currently available; this value is derived from the total capacity minus the allocated capacity The number of extents that are available to the logical volume

Total Capacity Available Capacity Available Extents

IBM Extent Pool Summary

301

Reserved Extents # of Volumes # of Ranks

The number of extents that are in reserved (this space must be explicitly released before the logical volume can use it) The number of logical volumes that have been configured from this extent pool; this is the storage that can be given to a host The number of ranks in this extent pool1 or 2

302

APTARE StorageConsole Report Users Guide

IBM Disk Summary

To access this report, in the Navigation pane select:
Capacity Manager > Storage Capacity & Utilization > IBM Disk Summary

In the Report Designer, you can narrow the report output by selecting values for the following criteria:
Disk State: Normal, New, Installing, Verifying, Formatting, Initializing, Certifying, Rebuilding, PFSed, Inter failed, Inappropriate, Removed, Failed, Failed - Deferred Disk Usage: unassigned, unconfigured, spare required, spare not required, array member Disk Classes: ENT, NL

ID Storage Array Array Site Disk Class Model Disk Usage Disk Interface Disk RPM Disk Rate State Capacity

Disk ID The physical storage array system The array site ID links to the IBM Array Site Summary. If a disk is not in an array site, it is available for other use. Enterprise fibre channel drives (ENT) or Nearline ATA drives (NL) The disk model identifier How this disk is currently being used: unassigned, unconfigured, spare required, spare not required, array member FCAL, SATA, SAS The disk revolutions per minute, such as 10000 or 15000 The minimum disk interface rate for the disks in the array site Normal, New, Installing, Verifying, Formatting, Initializing, Certifying, Rebuilding, PFSed, Inter failed, Inappropriate, Removed, Failed, Failed - Deferred The disks capacity

IBM Disk Summary

303

304

APTARE StorageConsole Report Users Guide

APTARE StorageConsole Release Notes, v6.5

Chapter16

HDS Dynamic Provisioning Reports

This chapter covers the following topics: Hitachi Dynamic Provisioning Pool Summary Hitachi Disk Summary Array Capacity & Utilization (HDP View)

305

Hitachi Dynamic Provisioning Pool Summary

To access this report, in the Navigation pane select:
Capacity Manager > Storage Capacity & Utilization > Hitachi DP Pool Summary

The Dynamic Provisioning Pool uses virtual volumes for data storage, with actual capacity available upon request to a host writing to LUN storage. Use this report to ensure that your pool always has sufficient free capacity, enabling on-demand provisioning to hosts.

Pool ID Storage Array

The name of the DP Pool The storage array on which the volume pool resides Capacity of the Pool Virtual volumes can have a capacity that is greater than the pool capacity; however, its imperative that you monitor the pool capacity to ensure that space is available on demand. Monitor this space to ensure that you do not deplete the available space in a pool, assuring that host requests for storage are not denied These thresholds monitor consumed capacity of the Dynamic Provisioning pool. The number of VOLs in this DP Pool; links to the LUN Utilization Summary to view the LDEVs that have been allocated to the DP Pool. The number of virtual volumes in this Dynamic Provisioning pool; links to the LUN Utilization Summary The capacity of the virtual volumes in the pool, including overhead for dynamic provisioning. Normal, Blocked, Over Threshold Cache logical partition for managing cache memory resources; as a best practice, often used to isolate storage allocations

Capacity

Free Capacity Threshold1 Threshold2 Number of DP Pool VOLs Number of DP VOLs Capacity of DP VOLs Status CLPR

306

APTARE StorageConsole Report Users Guide

Hitachi Disk Summary

To access this report, in the Navigation pane select:
Capacity Manager > Storage Capacity & Utilization > Hitachi Disk Summary

Device Name Storage Array Group Name Capacity Vendor Serial # Model Firmware Version RPM Disk Type Chassis # Role

The name of the disk The storage array in which the disk is located; links to the Array Capacity & Utilization report The group to which the disk belongs; links to the Array Group Details report Capacity of the disk Vendor of the disk Serial number of the disk Disk model The disks firmware version Disk revolutions per minute FC, SATA, BD, SAS, or Unknown The chassis number unknown, data, unallocated, offline, outofservice, spare, spareunitialized, n/a

Hitachi Disk Summary

307

Array Capacity & Utilization (HDP View)

To access this report, in the Navigation pane select:
Capacity Manager > Storage Capacity & Utilization > Array Capacity & Utilization

The Array Capacity and Utilization report provides an overview of storage array capacity and utilization. Use this report to identify storage arrays that are underutilized or highly utilized. The standard Array Capacity & Utilization report represents the HDS Dynamic Provisioning in the following manner:

308

APTARE StorageConsole Report Users Guide

APTARE StorageConsole Release Notes, v6.5

Chapter16

Virtualization Manager Reports

APTARE StorageConsole provides insight into Virtual Machine performance and the capacity utilization of mapped datastores. Virtualization Manager offers reports on storage resource utilization at the file system and virtual disk levels for each VM. In additional, forecasting reports predict future storage capacity needs in virtualized environments. The data collected on Virtual Machine storage is displayed in the reports described in this chapter. Using these reports, you can identify unused, reclaimable storage.
This chapter covers the following topics: Virtualization Terminology Overview of Virtualization Manager VM Server Summary VM Server Detail VM Summary VM Detail VM Files Summary Performance Summary Datastore Utilization Datastore Detail Datastore Usage Breakdown Physical Disk Utilization Physical Disk Detail Logical Disk Utilization VM Size Forecast Datastore Capacity Forecast

309

Virtualization Terminology
The following terms are defined in the context of APTARE StorageConsole Virtualization Manager.
Note: The usage of VM refers to a Virtual Machine, not Virtualization Manager. The capacity of all the datastores hosting a Virtual Machine File System (VMFS) or, for NAS storage, a Network File System (NFS). Also known as the Virtual Disks or Volume, this is the capacity of the virtual machine, derived from the virtual machines VMDK file(s). The datastore is the container for the VMs and their configuration files, Virtual Disks, and other files, such as the ISO files that are used for installing a virtual machine. A datastore provides the virtual storage resources via mapping to physical storage on DAS SCSI, FC SAN arrays, iSCSI, or NAS drives. The datastore is the storage provisioning source for one or more VMs on one or more hosts. The physical server (bare metal box) that is hosting the VMs via the virtualization software, such as ESX. Virtual machines reside on a VM Server, sometimes referred to as a Virtual Host or Virtual Machine Server. A VM can use either a virtual disk or it can access the host machines physical disk drivea Raw Device Mapping or Raw Disk Map (RDM) file. Raw disk mapping to a LUN may have been chosen in order to optimize performance. Also known as a Virtual Hard Drive or Virtual Machine Images (.VMDK file), this is the storage that is available to a guest operating system. It appears as a physical disk to the guest operating system, but it actually is a file that encapsulates the OS, applications, and data files of the VM. The VMDK file is accessed as if it were a physical hard disk. VMDK files can be either on the host or stored remotely. Also known as a VM Instancethe logical server running on a VM Server. See VM Server. The container for the guest operating system and applications; each VM is separate from all other VMs, even though they may share physical resources, such as memory and storage devices. Virtual Machine Serversee VM Server or Virtual Host. StorageConsole uses VM Server throughout its reports to represent the physical server that is hosting the Virtual Machinesfor example, the physical server running ESX.

Capacity: Datastore

Capacity: Logical

Datastore

VM Server

Physical (Raw) Disk

Virtual Disks

VM Guest Virtual Host Virtual Machine (VM)

VM Server

310

APTARE StorageConsole Report Users Guide

VMDK

See Virtual Disks. Note that for Raw Mapping (RDM), the VMDK file simply contains the metadata to map to a LUN. The Virtual Machine File System, with a hierarchical directory, provides the structure for managing access to shared, clustered storage. Each VM has a single subdirectory in the VMFS volume for the VMDK files (virtual disks). For raw disk mapping, the VMFS is mounted on the Virtual Machine. The Volume is the storage that is exposed to the OS (filesystems mounted it on it). A Volume maps to logical disks, such as C:\ and D:\, as seen by the guest OS. These logical disks can be:

VMFS

Volume

Virtual Disks, which are VMDK files that contain the actual data that is part of a datastore. Raw Mapping, which is a small VMDK file that contains the metadata that maps to a LUN. Note: Volume Usage shown in StorageConsole reports represents logical disk usage.

Virtualization Terminology

311

Overview of Virtualization Manager

Using APTARE StorageConsole Virtualization Manager, you can optimize storage allocation to virtual systems to improve efficiency and reduce costs. Virtualization Manager complements your virtual management console, with reports that can help you determine if storage resources are over- or under-utilized and if applications running in the virtual environment are contributing to storage access bottlenecks. With Virtualization Manager, you can easily view the virtual-to-physical relationships to understand what virtual systems are consuming physical storage, and more importantly, how much of that storage is consumed by out-dated, unnecessary snapshot files. For additional details, see Virtualization Terminology.

Understanding the Datastore

Since APTARE StorageConsole Virtualization Manager maps the VMs to the actual physical storage, its important to understand the Datastore. The Datastore is the container for the VMs and their configuration files, VM disks, and other files, such as the ISO files that are used for installing a virtual machine. A Datastore can be located on DAS SCSI, FC SAN arrays, iSCSI, or NAS drives. The Datastore is the storage provisioning source for one or more VMs, on one or more hosts, mapping to one or more physical storage devices.

312

APTARE StorageConsole Report Users Guide

All of the objects managed by VMware vCenter comprise the VM inventory: hosts, clusters, VMs, and Networks.

Characteristics of a Datastore
Configured as a clustered file system Configured per host, but multiple hosts can point to the same datastore Managed at the host level and the data center levelone datastore object per data center Datastore path format:
[<datastore>] <path>

where <datastore> is the datastore name and <path> is a slash-delimited path from the root of the datastore. Example: [storage] win2k/testing/bue11dtesting.vmx

Using Virtualization Manager for Planning and Monitoring

Using Virtualization Manager, you have the tools to effectively plan the deployment of virtual machines in your enterprise and then follow through with monitoring storage allocation and usage. In concert with Capacity Manager and Backup Manager, you have the ability to monitor all aspects of your storage environment and you can ensure that your data is sufficiently protected. Virtualization Manager offers the following solutions:
Virtual Environment Administration Reports for Planning & Monitoring

Determine optimal deployment of Virtual Machines Identify storage access bottlenecks

VM Size Forecast

VM Server Summary Performance Summary Reclaim space VM Summary - Choose a Datastore and drill down to the details to determine file system Identify VM files that are taking up allocations. storage, but are not in the VM Inventory VM Files Summary

Overview of Virtualization Manager

313

VM Server Summary
To access this report, in the Navigation pane select:
Virtualization Manager > Administration Reports > VM Server Summary

Use this report to view the list of Virtual Machine Servers, with drilldown access to reports that provide details to help you determine whats using the space on a datastore. View Virtualization Manager Scope Selection for the report scope options.

The VM Server Summary lists the VM Servers within your selected scopethat is, the physical servers that are hosting the VMs. When running this report, the following mutually exclusive scope selections are available:
Server Group Datastore Note: When using Advanced Filtering for Tabular Reports to filter rows by the Indicator Lights (for example, Status or Hardware Health) use the color: Red, Yellow, Green, or Gray.

Name IP Address State Status Hardware Health # CPUs Avg CPU Usage Last 24 Hrs Total Memory Avg Mem Usage Last 24 Hrs

Name of the VM Server that is hosting the virtual server; for example, the ESX host IP address of the VM Server VM connection state: Connected, Not Responding, Disconnected, None Gray=Status Unknown, Green=Normal, Yellow=Warning, Red=Alert, definite problem Indicates the overall health of the hosts hardware: None, Unknown, Green=Normal, Yellow=Warning, Red=Alert Total number of processors in the virtual machine The hosts average CPU usage for the past 24 hoursfor the number of samples taken within that timeframe Total memory capacity of the VM Server. The VM Servers average memory usage for the past 24 hoursfor the number of samples taken within that timeframe

314

APTARE StorageConsole Report Users Guide

# Disks

The number of disks that the VM Server can accesseither internal disks or LUNs. Drill down to the Physical Disk Utilization. Note that the disks are specific to the VM server, whereas the Datastore utilization may be using both VM Server disks and disks apart from the VM Server disks. Amount of disk space that is unallocated. Mouse over this thermometer to view the total, unallocated, and percentage unallocated. Click on this thermometer to view the Physical Disk Utilization. The number of datastores provisioned to the VM Server; drill down to the Datastore Utilization report Mouse over the thermometer bar to view the total datastore capacity, the amount used, and the % of the total used. Drill down to the Datastore Capacity Forecast. A VM is active when it is powered on. An inactive VM is in the inventory, but is powered off. This column shows the number of active VMs. Drill down to the VM Summary. The total number of VMs in the inventory, both active and inactive. Drill down to the VM Summary.

Unallocated # Datastores Datastore Usage

# Active VMs # Total VMs

VM Server Summary

315

VM Server Detail
This report can be accessed via the Name link in the VM Server Summary report.
Note: VMTools must be installed to enable collection of the IP address, Host name, mount points, and guest operating system of the VM.

VM and VM Disk Size Example

In the VM Server Detail shown above, the VM size is greater than the VM Disk size.
VM Size = the sum of all files for this VM (including snapshot files), indicating the amount of storage that the VM is actually using VM Disk Size = the amount of space that was presented to the Guest OS when the VM was created and configured

Given these definitions, your task would be to determine what is taking up all the storage for this VM. Often, a number of stale, unneeded snapshot files can be removed to free up space.
Click on the VM Name to view the VM Detail with the list of snapshots and VM Files. View the VM Files list, where the file path identifies the directory where the data is stored. From a Datastore perspective, view the Datastore Utilization and drill down to the Datastore Detail to identify the physical disks associated with a VMs storage utilization.

316

APTARE StorageConsole Report Users Guide

Summary Data
Name Host Name IP Address State Status Hardware Health System Vendor System Model Name of the VM Server that is hosting the virtual server; for example, the ESX host Hostname of the guest; value is displayed only if VMTools is installed IP address of the Virtual Machine; value is displayed only if VMTools is installed Network adapter connection state: Connected, Not Responding, Disconnected, None Gray=Status Unknown, Green=Normal, Yellow=Warning, Red=Alert, a definite problem Indicates the overall health of the hosts hardware: None, Unknown, Green=Normal, Yellow=Warning, Red=Alert Host vendor Model of the host system

VM Server Detail

317

Total Memory Total CPU CPU Vendor CPU Description CPU Speed # HBAs/Ports # NICs & NIC Speed # Total VMs # Active VMs # Datastores Datastore Usage # Disks Unallocated Version Last Updated

Total memory available as a resource to the VMs on this host Total CPU available as a resource to the VMs on this host Processors vendor Type of processor Processor speed Number of host bus adapters and ports on the VM Server Number of physical network interface cards and their speeds Number of VMs configured on this host and in the inventory A VM is active when it is in the inventory and powered on; it is inactive if it is in the inventory, but powered off. Number of datastores that this VM Server is using Amount of storage in the datastore that this VM Server is using The number of disks that the VM Server can accesseither internal disks or LUNs. Drill down to the Physical Disk Utilization. Mouse over the thermometer bar to view the total disk capacity, the amount used, and the % of the total used. Drill down to the Physical Disk Utilization. Version of the virtual server software, such as ESX Timestamp of last data collection

Performance & Forecast

CPU Memory Average and Maximum usage graphed over timefor the number of samples taken within that timeframe Average and Maximum usage graphed over timefor the number of samples taken within that timeframe

Largest VMs
Click the link to access the full list of the largest VMs, listed in descending order, with the top storage-consuming VMs at the top of the list.
Note: VMTools must be installed to enable collection of the IP address, Host name, mount points, and guest operating system of the VM. Name Host Name IP Address State Name of the VM Hostname of the guest; value is displayed only if VMTools is installed IP address of the Virtual Machine; value is displayed only if VMTools is installed None, Powered Off, Powered On, or Suspended

318

APTARE StorageConsole Report Users Guide

Status CPU Usage Memory Usage Volume Usage Datastore Capacity

Gray=Status Unknown, Green=Normal, Yellow=Warning, Red=Alert, definite problem The VMs average CPU usage for the past 24 hoursfor the number of samples taken within that timeframe The VMs average memory usage for the past 24 hoursfor the number of samples taken within that timeframe A Volume maps to logical disks, such as C:\ and D:\, as seen by the guest OS; usage for the past 24 hoursfor the number of samples taken within that timeframe. For inactive VMs, the usage is unknown. The used and total capacity of all the datastores on which a VM resides in a Virtual Machine File System (VMFS) or, for NAS storage, a Network File System (NFS) file.

Datastores
Name Total Capacity Used Free Usage Total VM Used Name of the Datastore; links to the Datastore Detail. The total capacity of the Datastore Amount of Datastore space in use Free space in bytes for the Datastore; value periodically updated by the server % of used Datastore capacity Total storage used by all VM files; links to the VM Files Summary. The sum of all virtual disksVMDK (.vmdk files). This sum does not include .snapshot metadata files, however, other outdated snapshot data may be in .vmdk files. For this reason, VMDK Used may exceed VM Disk Capacity, the amount that was configured when the VM was created. This is the amount of storage that was configured and presented to the Guest OS when the virtual disks were originally created for the VMs. The VM Servers that have mounted this Datastore; links to the VM Server Summary The number of VMs using this Datastore; links to the VM Summary. The number of extents that were added to expand the Datastore (up to 32 physical storage extents). The number of disks that the VM Server can accesseither internal disks or LUNs. Drill down to the Physical Disk Utilization. The number of arrays from which this datastore gets physical storage links to Array Capacity and Utilization. This provides the map from the Datastore to the arrays that supply storage to the Datastore.

VMDK Used

VM Disk Capacity # Sharing VM Servers # VMs # Extents # Disks # Arrays

VM Server Detail

319

Disks
These are the physical disks that are available to the VM Server.
Name of the storage device in the following 4-part format:
<HBA>:<SCSI target>:<SCSI LUN>:<disk partition>

Name

EXAMPLE: vmhba1:1:3:1 If vmha appears in the name, it indicates a specific physical HBA on the ESX server. If the fourth segment is not included in the name, it indicates that the datastore has consumed the whole disk/LUN. Disk type: DAS SCSI, Fibre Channel SAN, iSCSI, or NAS The disks vendor The name of the storage array in which the disk resides The name of the LUN; if it is a local disk, the LUN is null Operational state of the LUN, such as ok and degraded Total capacity of the host disk Amount of the disk storage that has been allocated Indicates the number of datastores using the disk The number of extents that were added to expand the datastore

Disk Type Vendor Array LUN Operational State Total Capacity Allocated Capacity # Datastores # Extents

320

APTARE StorageConsole Report Users Guide

VM Summary
To access this report, in the Navigation pane select:
Virtualization Manager > Administration Reports > VM Summary

Use this report to find the largest Virtual Machines.

Note: VMTools must be installed to enable collection of the IP address, Host name, mount points, and guest operating system of the VM.

View Virtualization Manager Scope Selection for the report scope options.

Note: When using Advanced Filtering for Tabular Reports to filter rows by the Indicator Lights (for example, Connection, Power, or Status) use the color: Red, Yellow, Green, or Gray.

VM Name VM Server Host Name IP Address

Name of the Virtual Machine The server that is hosting the VM Hostname of the guest; value is displayed only if VMTools is installed IP address of the Virtual Machine; value is displayed only if VMTools is installed

VM Summary

321

State (Connection, Power)

None, Powered Off, Powered On, or Suspended This is essentially an alarm indicator that reflects the condition of the resources: Gray=Status Unknown, Green=Normal, Yellow=Warning, Red=Alert, definite problem The hosts average CPU usage for the past 24 hoursfor the number of samples taken within that timeframe The hosts average Memory usage for the past 24 hoursfor the number of samples taken within that timeframe Size of the virtual machine, which includes VMDK files, log files, and snapshots; the sum of all the files taking up storage by this VM. See VM and VM Disk Size Example. This is the amount of storage that was configured and presented to the Guest OS when the virtual disk was originally created for the VM. See VM and VM Disk Size Example. This is the disk usage inside of the VM (for example, C:\, D:\) A Volume maps to logical disks, such as C:\ and D:\, as seen by the guest OS; usage for the past 24 hoursfor the number of samples taken within that timeframe. For inactive VMs, the usage is unknown. Datastores used by this VM

Status

Avg CPU Usage Last 24 Hours Avg Memory Usage Last 24 Hrs Size: VM

Size: VM Disk

Volume Usage

Datastore Usage

322

APTARE StorageConsole Report Users Guide

VM Detail
This report can be accessed via the Name link in the VM Summary report.

VM Detail

323

Summary Data
Name VM Server State Status VM Path Name System OS Current Snapshot Notes VMware Tools Tools Version Host Name IP Address VM Size Boot Time Suspend Time Datastore Resource Pool Last Update Date Name of the virtual machine Links to the VM Server Detail report None, Powered Off, Powered On, or Suspended Gray=Status Unknown, Green=Normal, Yellow=Warning, Red=Alert, definite problem The file path in datastore format; for example:
[storage] win2k/testing/bue11dtesting.vmx

Guest operating system running on the VM Path and name of the current snapshot The VMs annotation field Indicates if the VMware tools have been installed for the guest operating system Version of the VMware tools that are running in the guest operating system Hostname of the guest; value is displayed only if VMTools is installed IP address of the Virtual Machine; value is displayed only if VMTools is installed Amount of storage the VM takes up The VMs power-on time The time when the VM was put in a suspended state The datastore to which the VM belongs; links to the Datastore Detail report The resource pool (compartment) to which the VM belongs The last time the VMs configuration was updated

Performance & Forecast

Note: The default StorageConsole polling interval is set to every 5 hours, however, this can be customized. CPU Memory The CPU average and maximum usage to date. The Memory average and maximum usage to date.

VM Size Over Time

Displays the average and maximum VM storage usage to date.

324

APTARE StorageConsole Report Users Guide

Volumes
This table lists the local disks seen by the virtual machine, such as C:\, D:\.
Disk Path Total Capacity Used Free Usage The path to the VMs local disk Total capacity of the local, logical disk Amount of volume used Amount of the volume that is unused and potentially available Mouse over the thermometer to display the usage %

Disks
This table provides the details for the physical disks in the VM.
Disk Label Disk Type Capacity Datastore LUN The label of the physical disk RDISK = raw, physical disk; Capacity will be N/A for RDISKs VDISK = virtual disk The storage potential of the virtual disk The datastore to which the virtual disk belongs The LUN on which the virtual disks storage is located 1 = Persistent - immediate, permanent changes 2 = Non-persistent - changes do not persist once VM is powered off 3 = Undoable - user determines how and when changes are saved 4 = Append - changes appended to a log when VM is powered off

Mode

Snapshots
A tree structure represents the Snapshots for this VM. Example:

VM Detail

325

VM Files
File Name File Path Datastore VM Server VM file name The file path in datastore format; for example:
[storage] win2k/testing/bue11dtesting.vmx

Links to the Datastore Detail report Links to the VM Server Detail report File type identifier, such as: VmLog - log for VMware workstation activity (.log) VmNvram - VM BIOS state (.nvrm) VmDisk - contents of the VMs hard drive (.vmdk) VmSnapshot - metadata about snapshots (.vmsd) VmConfigFile - primary configuration file (.vmx) Size of the file Date of last file modification

File Type

File Size Last Modified

326

APTARE StorageConsole Report Users Guide

VM Files Summary
To access this report, in the Navigation pane select:
Virtualization Manager > Administration Reports > VM Files Summary

This report lists all VM files. Use this report to identify space that could be reclaimed. View Virtualization Manager Scope Selection for the report scope options.

File Name File Path Datastore VM Server VM Name Host Name VM Status

Name of the file The file path in datastore format; for example:
[storage] win2k/testing/bue11dtesting.vmx

The datastore in which this file resides The host that is running the VM software (ESX) Name of the virtual machine The server that is hosting the VMs Gray=Status Unknown, Green=Normal, Yellow=Warning, Red=Alert, definite problem

VM Files Summary

327

File type identifier, such as: VmLog - log for VMware workstation activity (.log) VmNvram - VM BIOS state (.nvrm) VmDisk - contents of the VMs hard drive (.vmdk) VmSnapshot - metadata about snapshots (.vmsd) VmConfigFile - primary configuration file (.vmx) Size of the file Date and time stamp of last file modification

File Type

File Size Last Modified

328

APTARE StorageConsole Report Users Guide

Performance Summary
To access this report, in the Navigation pane select:
Virtualization Manager > Administration Reports > Performance Summary

View Virtualization Manager Scope Selection for the report scope options. In the Report Designer, several Advanced options enable filtering of the output:
Report Options: CPU and/or Memory Report By: Each VM/Host, Consolidated

Performance Summary

329

Datastore Utilization
To access this report, in the Navigation pane select:
Virtualization Manager > Storage Capacity & Utilization > Datastore Utilization

View Virtualization Manager Scope Selection for the report scope options. The Datastore Utilization Summary gives you the ability to identify what storage is in use and where it is located. Click on the Datastore link to view the Datastore Detail where you can view the Extents and then link to the corresponding Physical Disk Detail. In addition, the Datastore Detail provides a link to the array from which the storage has been provisioned.

Name

The name of the Datastore links to Datastore Detail.

Total Capacity Total capacity of the datastore Free Amount of the datastore that currently is unused and potentially available

330

APTARE StorageConsole Report Users Guide

Used Usage

Total amount of the datastore that is in useboth VM usage and other files Mouse over the thermometer to view the % of the total capacity used. The sum of all virtual disksVMDK (.vmdk files). This sum does not include .snapshot metadata files, however, other outdated snapshot data may be in .vmdk files. For this reason, VMDK Used may exceed VM Disk Capacity, the amount that was configured when the VM was created. Size of the virtual machine, which includes VMDK files, log files, and snapshots; the sum of all the files taking up storage by this VM. This value links to the VM Files Summary, which lists the usage details. This is the amount of storage that was configured and presented to the Guest OS when the virtual disk was originally created for the VM. The number of hosts configured to access this datastore. Number of virtual machines stored on this datastore The number of extents that were added to expand the datastore (up to 32 physical storage extents). The number of disks used by this datastore (up to 32 physical disks) The number of arrays from which this datastore gets physical storage; links to Array Capacity and Utilization.

VMDK Used

Total VM Used VM Disk Capacity # Shared Hosts # VMs # Extents # Disks # Arrays

Datastore Utilization

331

Datastore Detail
This report can be accessed from the Datastore Utilization report.

Name Type Server Folder Multiple Host Access Last Updated # VMs # Extents # Disks # Arrays

Name of the datastore Datastore type: a specific NFS file system or NAS This field is related to Datastore type and will be populated only when the type is NAS. The VM folder in which this Datastore is located. This field is related to Datastore type and will be populated only when the type is NAS. Indicates if this datastore can be shared by multiple hosts: Yes or No Timestamp of the last write access This number links to the VM Summary report, listing the VMs associated with this Datastore. The number of extents that were added to expand the datastore (up to 32 physical storage extents). The number of physical disks associated with the datastore The number of arrays from which this datastore gets physical storage links to Array Capacity and Utilization. The sum of all virtual disksVMDK (.vmdk files). This sum does not include .snapshot metadata files, however, other outdated snapshot data may be in .vmdk files. For this reason, VMDK Used may exceed VM Disk Capacity, the amount that was configured when the VM was created. Amount of the Datastore used by VMs Total capacity of this Datastore Available capacity in this Datastore Amount of this Datastores capacity already in use

VMDK Used

Total VM Used Total Capacity Free Capacity Used Capacity

332

APTARE StorageConsole Report Users Guide

Capacity Usage Total VM Disk Capacity

Mouse over this thermometer to view the usage percentage This is the amount of storage that was configured and presented to the Guest OS when the virtual disk was originally created for the VM. When you connect to a VM client, this capacity appears as hard disks.

Datastore Capacity & Forecast

Extents

Name of the storage device in the following 4-part format:

Name

EXAMPLE: vmhba1:1:3:1 If vmhba appears in the name, it indicates a specific physical HBA on the ESX server. If the fourth segment is not included in the name, it indicates that the datastore has consumed the whole disk/LUN. VMFS or NFS physical, logical Capacity of this particular extent The disk on which the extent resides If there is a LUN mapping, a link to the corresponding array accesses the Array Capacity and Utilization report.

Type Mode Capacity Disk Array

Datastore Detail

333

Shared VM Servers
Name IP Address State Status Hardware Health # CPUs Avg CPU Usage Last 24 Hrs Total Memory Name of the VM Server IP address of the VM Server Network adapter connection state: Connected, Not Responding, Disconnected, None Gray=Status Unknown, Green=Normal, Yellow=Warning, Red=Alert, a definite problem Indicates the overall health of the hosts hardware: None, Unknown, Green=Normal, Yellow=Warning, Red=Alert Number of CPUs on the VM Server The VM servers average CPU usage for the past 24 hoursfor the number of samples taken within that timeframe Total memory available on the VM server

Avg Mem Usage The VM Servers average CPU usage for the past 24 hoursfor the number of samples taken within that timeframe Last 24 Hrs # Datastores Datastores Usage # Disks Unallocated Number of Datastores associated with this VM server; links to the Datastore Utilization report. Mouse over this thermometer to view the total, used, and percentage used. Click on the thermometer to view the Datastore Capacity Forecast. The number of disks that the VM Server can accesseither internal disks or LUNs. Drill down to the Physical Disk Utilization. Amount of disk space that is unallocated. Mouse over this thermometer to view the total, unallocated, and percentage unallocated. Click on this thermometer to view the Physical Disk Utilization. A VM is active when it is powered on. An inactive VM is in the inventory, but is powered off. Click on this link to view the VM Summary. Number of VMs hosted by this VM server. Click on this link to view the VM Summary.

# Active VMs # Total VMs

VM Utilization
VM Name VM Server Host Name IP Address State (Connection) Name of the VM (as displayed in VMware vCenter) The server that is hosting the VM Hostname of the guest; value is displayed only if VMTools is installed IP address of the Virtual Machine; value is displayed only if VMTools is installed Network adapter connection state: Connected, Not Responding, Disconnected, None

334

APTARE StorageConsole Report Users Guide

State (Power) Status Avg CPU Usage Last 24 Hrs

On, Off Gray=Status Unknown, Green=Normal, Yellow=Warning, Red=Alert, a definite problem The hosts average CPU usage for the past 24 hoursfor the number of samples taken within that timeframe

Avg Mem Usage The hosts average Memory usage for the past 24 hoursfor the number of samples taken within that timeframe Last 24 Hrs Size (VM) Size (VM Disk) The size of this VM (includes VMDK files, snapshots, and log files), taking up Datastore space This is the amount of storage that was configured and presented to the Guest OS when the virtual disk was originally created for the VM. This is the aggregation of the logical disk usage. A Volume maps to logical disks, such as C:\ and D:\, as seen by the guest OS. The VM Disks are partitioned into volumes, which are exposed to the OS. Mouse over this thermometer to view the total amount, the amount used, and the percentage of the volume used by this VM. The list of Datastores that this VM is using.

Storage (Volume Usage)

Datastores

Datastore Detail

335

Datastore Usage Breakdown

Use this report to view a graphical representation of the file types comprising each datastore. See the Overview of Virtualization Manager for a diagram and description of the types of files that are maintained in a Datastore.

336

APTARE StorageConsole Report Users Guide

Physical Disk Utilization

To access this report, in the Navigation pane select:
Virtualization Manager > Storage Capacity & Utilization > Physical Disk Utilization

View Virtualization Manager Scope Selection for the report scope options.

Name VM Server Disk Type Vendor Array

The raw device mapping path, in the format:

vmhba<HBA>:<SCSI target>:<SCSI LUN>

Name of the VM Server SCSI device type, such as disk Device manufacturer The array on which the disk resides; links to the Array Capacity & Utilization report The LUN path, in the format:
<HBA>:<SCSI target>:<SCSI LUN>:<disk partition>

LUN

Links to the LUN Utilization Summary Operational State The devices state of health

Physical Disk Utilization

337

Total Capacity Allocated Capacity # Datastores # Extents

Total capacity of the disk The amount of the disk that has been allocated The number of datastores that are using the disk The number of extents associated with the disk

338

APTARE StorageConsole Report Users Guide

Physical Disk Detail

To access this report, in the Navigation pane select:
Virtualization Manager > Storage Capacity & Utilization > Physical Disk Utilization

Then, click on a Name link.

Name VM Server Operational State Model Vendor SCSI Level Last Updated Disk Type Total Capacity

The raw device mapping path, in the format:

vmhba<HBA>:<SCSI target>:<SCSI LUN>

Name of the VM Server Operational state of the disk, such as ok and degraded Model of the disk Device manufacturer The devices SCSI level, an indicator of clock and bus speeds Last date and time of data collection SCSI device type, such as disk Capacity of this disk The LUN path, in the format:

LUN

<HBA>:<SCSI target>:<SCSI LUN>:<disk partition>

Links to the LUN Utilization Summary.

Physical Disk Detail

339

Array # FC Targets # iSCSI Targets iSCSI Target Name iSCSI Node Name Array Node WWN Array Port WWN HBA Node WWN HBA Port WWN

Name of the array in which the disk is located; links to the Array Capacity & Utilization report Number of Fibre Channel targetspaths to the array from the host The number of paths to the iSCSI array from the host The actual target name from the arrays perspective The actual node name from the arrays perspective Storage array node World Wide Name Storage array ports World Wide Name Host bus adapter node World Wide Name Host bus adapter port World Wide Name Name: Name of the extent Type: Type of partition, such as vmfs, linuxSwap, vmkDiagnostic Capacity: Total capacity of the extent Datastore: The datastore to which the extent belongs; links to the Datastore Detail

Extents

340

APTARE StorageConsole Report Users Guide

Logical Disk Utilization

To access this report, in the Navigation pane select:
Virtualization Manager > Administration Reports > VM Summary

Then, click on the Volume Usage thermometer.

Disk Path VM Name Total Capacity Used Free Usage

The path to the logical disk Virtual machine name Total amount of storage allocated to the VM Amount of the VMs allocated storage that is in use Amount of the VMs allocated storage that is available for use A thermometer represents the percentage of disk usage

Logical Disk Utilization

341

VM Size Forecast
To access this report, in the Navigation pane select:
Virtualization Manager > Forecast & Planning > VM Size Forecast

This VM report projects the growth of the VM over time, based on historical data. View Virtualization Manager Scope Selection for the report scope options.

The VM name links to the VM Server Detail.

342

APTARE StorageConsole Report Users Guide

Datastore Capacity Forecast

To access this report, in the Navigation pane select:
Virtualization Manager > Forecast & Planning > Datastore Capacity Forecast

View Virtualization Manager Scope Selection for the report scope options.

The Datastore name links to the Datastore Detail.

Datastore Capacity Forecast

343

344

APTARE StorageConsole Report Users Guide

APTARE StorageConsole Release Notes, v6.5

Chapter16

Replication Manager Reports

APTARE StorageConsole reports on SnapMirror data replication details, enabling you to easily identify successful replication, but more importantly, any data protection vulnerability.
This chapter covers the following topics: Overview of Replication Manager SnapMirror Summary SnapMirror Details SnapMirror Schedule SnapMirror Status Summary SnapMirror Data Transfer SnapMirror Volume/QTrees At Risk SnapMirror Relationship Summary Data Protection Dashboard FlexClone Summary Aggregate Mirror Summary SnapVault Secondary Configuration SnapVault Summary SnapVault Detail SnapVault Status

345

Overview of Replication Manager

The APTARE StorageConsole Replication Manager offers a view of your NetApp Data ONTAP SnapMirror, SnapVault, and FlexClone environments. These reports enable quick access to the data replication details to ensure that your business-critical data is protected and has been successfully replicated on schedule. SnapMirror can replicate data in the following manner:
Volume to QTree Volume to Volume QTree to Volume QTree to QTree

SnapVault can replicate data in the following manner:

Volume to QTree QTree to QTree

346

APTARE StorageConsole Report Users Guide

SnapMirror Summary
To access this report, in the Navigation pane select:
Replication Manager > SnapMirror Reports > SnapMirror Summary

The SnapMirror Summary provides a listing of the status of SnapMirror transactions. It lists the source-destination pairs, along with the most frequently used relevant metrics.

SnapMirror Summary

347

The source location will be displayed in one of the following formats: Source Location
NetApp Storage System: Volume Name NetApp Storage System: Volume Name/QTree Name

Links to the NetApp Volume Details. The destination location will be displayed in one of the following formats: Destination Location
NetApp Storage System: Volume Name NetApp Storage System: Volume Name/QTree Name

Links to the NetApp Volume Details. Mirror Timestamp Contents Last Transfer Size Last Transfer Duration (Secs) Transfer KB/Secs Base Snapshot State Status Summary Status Lag Time Date and time of last SnapMirror transaction, including unsuccessful mirrors. Links to SnapMirror Details. The active file system state of the destination: replica, transitioning, or original Size of the last SnapMirror transfer Duration in seconds of the last SnapMirror transfer Rate of data transfer The name of the last snapshot transferred from source to destination The state of the SnapMirror pair: un-initialized, snapmirrored, broken-off, quiesced, source, or unknown Transfer completion status for the source-destination pair: idle, transferring, pending, aborting, migrating, quiescing, resyncing, waiting, syncing, in-sync, or paused. Mouse over the Failed status to reveal the actual error message The length of time since the last SnapMirror transfer

348

APTARE StorageConsole Report Users Guide

SnapMirror Details
To access this report, in the Navigation pane select:
Replication Manager > SnapMirror Reports > SnapMirror Summary

Then, click on a Mirror Timestamp link. The SnapMirror Summary provides the details of a SnapMirror transaction.

Source Storage Array Destination Storage Array Source Volume Destination Volume Source QTree Destination QTree Contents Mirror Timestamp State

The name of the Source storage array links to the NetApp Storage System Detail. The name of the Destination storage array links to the NetApp Storage System Detail. The source volume name links to the NetApp Volume Detail. The destination volume name links to the NetApp Volume Detail. The source QTree name links to the NetApp QTree Summary. The destination QTree name links to the NetApp QTree Summary. The active file system state of the destination: replica, transitioning, or original Date and time of last SnapMirror transaction, including unsuccessful mirrors The state of the SnapMirror pair: un-initialized, snapmirrored, broken-off, quiesced, source, or unknown

SnapMirror Details

349

Status Transfer Progress Current Transfer Type Last Transfer Duration (Seconds)

Transfer completion status for the source-destination pair: idle, transferring, pending, aborting, migrating, quiescing, resyncing, waiting, syncing, in-sync, or paused. Indicates if a current transfer is in progress The current SnapMirror transfer type: initialize, store, schedule, retry, retrieve, resync, or migrate. A value is displayed only if there is a transfer in progress. Length of time for the last mirror data transfer The source location will be displayed in one of the following formats:

Last Transfer From

NetApp Storage System: Volume Name NetApp Storage System: Volume Name/QTree Name

Last Transfer Size

Amount of data in the last mirror data transfer

350

APTARE StorageConsole Report Users Guide

SnapMirror Schedule
To access this report, in the Navigation pane select:
Replication Manager > SnapMirror Reports > SnapMirror Schedule

Note that the SnapMirror schedule is initiated by the Destination system.

The source location will be displayed in one of the following formats: Source Location
NetApp Storage System: Volume Name NetApp Storage System: Volume Name/QTree Name

Links to the NetApp Volume Details. The notation is similar to crontab format: - means match nothing 1 means match day 1 1,3 means match days 1 and 3 1-3 means match days 1, 2, 3 1-30/7 means match every 7th day until the 30th day * means match all possible values The notation is similar to crontab format: - means match nothing 1 means match hour 1 1,3 means match hours 1 and 3 1-3 means match hours 1, 2, 3 1-24/4 means match every 4th hour until the end of the day * means match all possible values

Day of the Month

Hours

SnapMirror Schedule

351

The notation is similar to crontab format: - means match nothing 1 means match minute 1 1,3 means match minutes 1 and 3 1-3 means match minutes 1, 2, 3 0-55/5 means match every 5th minute until the 55th minute * means match all possible values The maximum transfer rate in KB/sec. Typically, this is the fastest possible rate of the storage system. Error message displayed only if there is a transfer error Date/timestamp of the last successful SnapMirror transfer Links to SnapMirror Details.

Minutes

Max Transfer Rate Error Last Successful

SnapMirror Status Summary

To access this report, in the Navigation pane select:
Replication Manager > SnapMirror Reports > SnapMirror Status Note: SnapMirror Status is based on the last sampling of data. NetApp keeps track of the latest SnapMirror schedule, however, the data shown in this report reflects the history of what was captured from the NetApp SnapMirror data. In some cases, a SnapMirror transaction may have occurred between data collection cycles.

This bar chart provides an at-a-glance view of the success or failure for each selected timeframe, such as days, weeks, or months. Mouse over the colored section of each bar to view the numeric details. Click on a colored section of a bar to drill down to the SnapMirror Summary.

352

APTARE StorageConsole Report Users Guide

SnapMirror Data Transfer

To access this report, in the Navigation pane select:
Replication Manager > SnapMirror Reports > SnapMirror Data Transfer

This bar chart provides an at-a-glance view of the amount of SnapMirror data transferred from NetApp source storage systems to destination storage systems. Click on a bar to drill down to the SnapMirror Summary for the corresponding time period.

SnapMirror Data Transfer

353

SnapMirror Volume/QTrees At Risk

To access this report, in the Navigation pane select:
Replication Manager > SnapMirror Reports > SnapMirror Volume/QTrees At Risk

Use this report to pro-actively track the storage being consumed by SnapMirror transactions. Identify SnapMirror Volume and QTree usage that is expected to exceed capacity. To configure this report to alert you when Volumes and/or QTrees are at risk, generate the report and save an instance. Then, configure an alert to email you when this report is populated with volumes or QTrees at risk.

Source Capacity

Capacity of the SnapMirror source

Source Capacity Used Amount of the source that is in use Risk Date Destination Capacity Destination Capacity Used Space Guarantee on Destination The point at which SnapMirror storage will be limited Capacity of the SnapMirror destination Amount of the destination that is in use Indicates if the destination volume has a space guarantee enabled The source location will be displayed in one of the following formats: Source Location
NetApp Storage System: Volume Name NetApp Storage System: Volume Name/QTree Name

The destination location will be displayed in one of the following formats: Destination Location
NetApp Storage System: Volume Name NetApp Storage System: Volume Name/QTree Name

Base Snapshot

The name of the last snapshot transferred from source to destination

354

APTARE StorageConsole Report Users Guide

SnapMirror Relationship Summary

To access this report, in the Navigation pane select:
Replication Manager > SnapMirror Reports > SnapMirror Relationship Summary

The source location will be displayed in one of the following formats: Source Location
NetApp Storage System: Volume Name NetApp Storage System: Volume Name/QTree Name

The destination location will be displayed in one of the following formats: Destination Location
NetApp Storage System: Volume Name NetApp Storage System: Volume Name/QTree Name

Mirror Timestamp Contents Last Transfer Size (KB) Last Transfer Duration (Secs)

Date and time of last SnapMirror transaction, including unsuccessful mirrors The active file system state of the destination: replica, transitioning, or original Amount of data in the last mirror transfer Length of time for the last mirror data transfer

SnapMirror Relationship Summary

355

Transfer KB/Secs Base Snapshot State Status Summary Status Lag Time

Rate of mirror data transfer The name of the last snapshot transferred from source to destination uninitialized, snapmirrored, broken-off, quiesced, source, unknown Transfer completion status for the source-destination pair: idle, transferring, pending, aborting, migrating, quiescing, resyncing, waiting, syncing, in-sync, or paused. Success, Failed - Mouse over the Failed status to view the error message that contains the details of why the transfer failed The length of time since the last SnapMirror transfer

356

APTARE StorageConsole Report Users Guide

Data Protection Dashboard

To access this report, in the Navigation pane select:
Replication Manager > SnapMirror Reports > Data Protection Dashboard

This report provides an at-a-glance view of the status of your SnapMirror data transfers, with drilldowns to details so that you can quickly resolve issues. Click on a colored circle to drill down to the SnapMirror Summary.

Data Protection Dashboard

357

FlexClone Summary
To access this report, in the Navigation pane select:
Replication Manager > FlexClone Reports > FlexClone Summary

Parent Volume Child Volume

The parent NetApp volume links to the NetApp Volume Details. The child volume of the FlexClone transaction links to its NetApp Volume Details.

Parent Base Snapshot The name of the initial, base snapshot Clone Creation Date Clone Split Date Split Estimate Aggr Available The date and timestamp when the clone was created The date and timestamp when the clone was split The amount of storage estimated to be consumed by the split The amount of storage on the aggregate that is not in use

358

APTARE StorageConsole Report Users Guide

Aggregate Mirror Summary

To access this report, in the Navigation pane select:
Replication Manager > Aggregate Mirror Reports > Aggregate Mirror Summary

Aggregate Name Mirror Status

The NetApp Aggregate that was mirrored; links to the NetApp Aggregate Detail. The Aggregate Mirror status: invalid, uninitialized, needs CP count check, CP count check in progress, unmirrored, mirrored, mirror degraded, mirror resynchronizing, failed, or limbo

Mirror Creation Date Date and timestamp of the mirror creation

Aggregate Mirror Summary

359

SnapVault Secondary Configuration

To access this report, in the Navigation pane select:
Replication Manager > SnapVault Reports > SnapVault Sec Configuration

Primary System Primary Path Secondary Path Max Transfer Rate

The primary system of the SnapVault relationship and also the baseline transfer Links to the NetApp Storage System Detail. This path is used for the source of the baseline transfer This path is the destination of the baseline transfer and as such, is created during the baseline transfer Maximum transfer rate; KB treated as 1024 bytes Indicates the maximum number of times this transfer will be attempted, as set in the SnapVault configuration. If a transfer isnt successful after this number of tries, the secondary will not try again and all the data that was transferred on previous attempts will be removed. Timestamp of the last successful transfer Amount of data in the last SnapVault transfer The amount of time from the start of the most recent successful transfer The name of the last SnapShot for this primary system

Tries Count

Last Successful Date Last Transfer Size Lag Time Last Base SnapShot Name

360

APTARE StorageConsole Report Users Guide

SnapVault Summary
To access this report, in the Navigation pane select:
Replication Manager > SnapVault Reports > SnapVault Summary

The destination location will be displayed in one of the following formats: Destination Location
NetApp Storage System: Volume Name NetApp Storage System: Volume Name/QTree Name

Mirror Timestamp Contents Last Transfer Size Last Transfer Duration (Secs) Transfer KB/Sec Base Snapshot State Status Summary Status Lag Time

Date and time of last SnapVault transaction Links to the SnapVault Detail. The active file system state of the destination: replica, transitioning, or original Amount of data in the last SnapVault transfer Length of time for the last SnapVault data transfer Rate of SnapVault data transfer The name of the last snapshot transferred from source to destination uninitialized, snapvaulted, broken-off, quiesced, source, restoring, unknown aborting, idle, pending, quiescing, restoring, resyncing, transferring Success, Failed - Mouse over the Failed status to view the error message that contains the details of why the transfer failed The length of time since the beginning of the last successful transfer from the source. This field is populated only for successful baseline transfers.

SnapVault Summary

361

SnapVault Detail

Source System Source Volume Source QTree Contents State Transfer Progress Destination System Destination Volume Destination QTree Mirror Timestamp

Hostname of the source system Volume of the source system QTree of the source system The active file system state of the destination: replica, transitioning, or original The state of the source-destination relationship: unitialized, snapvaulted, broken-off, unknown, source, restoring, quiesced Indicates the amount of data transferred so far, available only for active transfers Hostname of the destination system Volume of the destination system QTree of the destination system Date and time of last SnapVault transaction

362

APTARE StorageConsole Report Users Guide

Status Current Transfer Type Last Transfer Duration (Secs) Last Transfer Size Last Transfer From Last Transfer Type

Transfer completion status for the source-destination pair: idle, transferring, pending, aborting, migrating, quiescing, resyncing, waiting, syncing, in-sync, or paused. This field is populated only for active transfers. initialize, update, retry, or resync Duration of the last transfer Amount of data transferred in the last SnapVault transactionin kilobytes (1024 bytes) The name of the last transfers source system initialize, update, retry, or resync

Schedule Report (Primary and Secondary)

Schedule Name Storage Array Volume Name Day of Week Hour of Day Retention Count Status ID of the SnapVault schedule The name of the storage array The volume related to this schedule A comma-separated list or a range of days (3-letter abbreviation) for this schedule A comma-separated list or a range of hours for this schedule, where 0 represents midnight The maximum number of snapshots that will be kept for this schedule Transfer completion status for the scheduled SnapVault: idle, transferring, pending, aborting, migrating, quiescing, resyncing, waiting, syncing, in-sync, or paused. Secondary Schedule only Y or N if auto-update is configured, schedules will update transfers before a new snapshot is created

Is Auto Update

SnapVault Detail

363

SnapVault Schedule
To access this report, in the Navigation pane select:
Replication Manager > SnapVault Reports > SnapVault Schedule

Schedule Name Storage Array Volume Name Day of Week Hour of Day Retention Count Status

Unique identifier of a SnapVault schedule; this name serves as a prefix in the name of snapshots created by this schedule Link to the Storage System Details. The volume related to this schedule A comma-separated list or a range of days (3-letter abbreviation) for this schedule A comma-separated list or a range of hours for this schedule, where 0 represents midnight The maximum number of snapshots that will be kept for this schedule Transfer completion status for the source-destination pair: idle, transferring, pending, aborting, migrating, quiescing, resyncing, waiting, syncing, in-sync, or paused. Relevant only if you selected Secondary in the Report Designer; Y or N if auto-update is configured, schedules will update transfers before a new snapshot is created

Is Auto Update

364

APTARE StorageConsole Report Users Guide

SnapVault Status
To access this report, in the Navigation pane select:
Replication Manager > SnapVault Reports > SnapVault Status Summary

Click on a colored section of a bar to drill down to the SnapVault Summary.

SnapVault Status

365

SnapVault Data Transfer

To access this report, in the Navigation pane select:
Replication Manager > SnapVault Reports > SnapVault Data Transfer

Mouse over a bar to view the amount of data transferred. Click on a bar to view the SnapVault Summary.

366

APTARE StorageConsole Report Users Guide

Index
A
applications at risk, 235 over-provisioned, 236 storage dashboard, 237 array capacity, 214, 260 capacity forecasting, 232 group details, 229 port utilization, 230 content pane, 2

J
job detail, 105 duration, 110 notes, 108 queue, 119 running, 119 status summary, 101 summary by server, 118 summary report, 103 volume summary, 109

D
dashboard command center, 124 creating, 50 data protection, 126 media forecasting, 176 operations, 122 storage pools, 138 data protection, 126 deleting reports, 32 designing reports, 10 disk usage & performance, 159 drive performance, 165, 167 utilization, 165 duration backup/restore, 110

B
backup duration report, 110 bar chart example, 81 billing chargeback report, 248 usage policy, 186

L
log error, 112 login/logout, 5 LUN at risk, 252 over-provisioned, 254 utilization, 225

C
capacity at risk, 252 planning, 175 capacity reports array capacity, 214, 260 array forecast, 232 array group, 229 array port, 230 chargeback, 248 host detail, 221 host forecast, 233 host utilization, 219 hosts at risk, 256 LUN utilization, 225 LUNs at risk, 252 over-provisioned hosts, 258 over-provisioning, 254 changing password, 7 reports, 30 chargeback, 248 client consecutive errors, 114 NetWorker instance, 201 protection summary, 135 columns, 29 command center, 124

E
emailing reports, 38 error consecutive, 114 error log summary, 112 export reports, 34

M
media availability forecasting, 179 consumption forecast, 180 current summary, 144 forecasting dashboard, 176 tape detail, 146 tape summary, 145 usage details, 181 menus, 3 message of the day, 127 mission control, 132 monthly summary, 117

F
failed jobs, 46 forecasting, 175 array capacity, 232 host capacity, 233 media, 176 media availability, 179 media consumption, 180 scratch pool, 183 tape drive usage, 182

N
navigation report, 1 NetApp reports, 260 note adding to job, 105 notes, 108

H
home page, 54 host at risk, 256 capacity forecasting, 233 over-provisioned, 258 utilization detail, 221 utilization summary, 219

O
operations dashboard, 122 over-provisioning, 254 hosts, 258

Index

367

LUN, 254

S
saving reports, 31 scheduling reports, 34 scope, 15, 16 scratch pool, 183 search report, 1, 32 servers, 18 server consumption summary, 191 details, 128 groups, 131 search, 18 service level backup start time, 151 sharing reports, 46 SLA backup duration, 155 backup start time, 151 backup status, 153 sorting, 29 SQL query, 64 storage pools, 138 storage unit summary, 172

P
password, 7 policy backup details, 194 billing & chargeback, 186 NetBackup, 193 NetWorker, 198 TSM domain details, 197 TSM domains, 196 profile, user, 6 protection client, 135

Q
queue job summary, 119

R
real time status, 173 refresh reports, 29 report template designer formatting, 78 SQL Query, 64 reports changing, 30 custom, 55 deleting, 32 designing, 10 emailing, 38 exporting reports, 34 finding, 1 forecast, 175 generating, 26 instances, 14 job summary, 103 parameters, 20 refresh, 29 saving, 31 scheduling, 34 scope, 15, 16 searching, 32 sharing, 46 templates, 14 viewing, 42 restore duration report, 110 files/folders, 205 restoring files/folders, 205

T
tape drive forecasting usage, 182 scratch pool, 183 usage, 182 time zone, 104 TSM database utilization, 171 storage pools, 138

U
utilization chargeback, 248 largest volume, 116 TSM database, 171

V
volume largest, 116 summary, 109 utilization, 116

368

APTARE StorageConsole Report Users Guide

CRTP-full Exam Report
100% (6)
CRTP-full Exam Report
23 pages
Smartgit Quickstart Guide
No ratings yet
Smartgit Quickstart Guide
28 pages
Early Childhood and Development (ECD) : Checklist
100% (1)
Early Childhood and Development (ECD) : Checklist
6 pages
Untitled
100% (1)
Untitled
950 pages
Enterprise Scan Installation Guide
No ratings yet
Enterprise Scan Installation Guide
19 pages
Testing Before You Download and Install Firmware
No ratings yet
Testing Before You Download and Install Firmware
5 pages
Servicing The Lenovo RackSwitich G8272 PDF
No ratings yet
Servicing The Lenovo RackSwitich G8272 PDF
37 pages
Installing Baanerp Applications On Os/390: Kathryn Arrell, Lou Doran, Nicholas Rodoflich, Lee Siegmund, Jeff Wiese
No ratings yet
Installing Baanerp Applications On Os/390: Kathryn Arrell, Lou Doran, Nicholas Rodoflich, Lee Siegmund, Jeff Wiese
202 pages
F5 CLI VIP Creation
No ratings yet
F5 CLI VIP Creation
3 pages
Online Furniture Shopping System
100% (5)
Online Furniture Shopping System
71 pages
Group A 1.2 Present and Past Habits Group B 1.2 Present and Past Habits
67% (3)
Group A 1.2 Present and Past Habits Group B 1.2 Present and Past Habits
2 pages
Official Python Tutorial
100% (1)
Official Python Tutorial
127 pages
NetBackup 10 Data Sheet
No ratings yet
NetBackup 10 Data Sheet
6 pages
Docker Presentation
No ratings yet
Docker Presentation
8 pages
NetBackup Questions
No ratings yet
NetBackup Questions
3 pages
Netbackup Error Codes Trouble Shoot
No ratings yet
Netbackup Error Codes Trouble Shoot
7 pages
Open Source For You May 2017
100% (2)
Open Source For You May 2017
109 pages
Hitachi VSP G1000 ALUA Support
No ratings yet
Hitachi VSP G1000 ALUA Support
23 pages
MongoDB Manual Master
No ratings yet
MongoDB Manual Master
1,142 pages
MDT Installation Guide Step by Step
No ratings yet
MDT Installation Guide Step by Step
15 pages
Suma43 Guide
No ratings yet
Suma43 Guide
224 pages
Datastage Admin
No ratings yet
Datastage Admin
161 pages
Sun Training Guide Oct04
No ratings yet
Sun Training Guide Oct04
22 pages
Server Crash Troubleshooting
No ratings yet
Server Crash Troubleshooting
35 pages
AdvFS Admin
No ratings yet
AdvFS Admin
231 pages
SOP - HPUX Installation
No ratings yet
SOP - HPUX Installation
21 pages
NetWorker - Updating The NetWorker Software-NetWorker 19.4
No ratings yet
NetWorker - Updating The NetWorker Software-NetWorker 19.4
74 pages
The DSC Book
No ratings yet
The DSC Book
163 pages
EDB Postgres Advanced Server Guide v11
No ratings yet
EDB Postgres Advanced Server Guide v11
329 pages
Red Hat Openshift Container Storage 4.6: Planning Your Deployment
No ratings yet
Red Hat Openshift Container Storage 4.6: Planning Your Deployment
25 pages
Apache Mod Cluster UserGuide PDF
No ratings yet
Apache Mod Cluster UserGuide PDF
106 pages
JenkinsEnterprise UserGuide 1.0 PDF
No ratings yet
JenkinsEnterprise UserGuide 1.0 PDF
88 pages
AMOS 22.6 AMOS Database Standards
No ratings yet
AMOS 22.6 AMOS Database Standards
33 pages
BAM 6.7 Implementation PDF
No ratings yet
BAM 6.7 Implementation PDF
253 pages
V$Lock V$SQL V$session DBA Locks V$process V$sqlstats
No ratings yet
V$Lock V$SQL V$session DBA Locks V$process V$sqlstats
15 pages
Vcs Install 601 Aix
No ratings yet
Vcs Install 601 Aix
477 pages
Veeam Backup 11 0 User Guide Vsphere
No ratings yet
Veeam Backup 11 0 User Guide Vsphere
1,857 pages
Documentum Foundation Classes Version 6 Development Guide
100% (10)
Documentum Foundation Classes Version 6 Development Guide
160 pages
Miktex PDF
No ratings yet
Miktex PDF
108 pages
Docklight Manual
No ratings yet
Docklight Manual
55 pages
Red Hat Enterprise Linux 9 Migrating To Identity Management On Rhel 9
No ratings yet
Red Hat Enterprise Linux 9 Migrating To Identity Management On Rhel 9
40 pages
Percona XtraBackup 2.4 Documentation
No ratings yet
Percona XtraBackup 2.4 Documentation
200 pages
QRadar Domains and Tenants - OpenMic - October 2018 PDF
No ratings yet
QRadar Domains and Tenants - OpenMic - October 2018 PDF
47 pages
Korn Shell (KSH) Programming
100% (1)
Korn Shell (KSH) Programming
34 pages
Same Same, But Better: Comparing Artifactory To Other Binary Repository Managers
No ratings yet
Same Same, But Better: Comparing Artifactory To Other Binary Repository Managers
20 pages
Veeam Backup 10 0 Explorers User Guide
No ratings yet
Veeam Backup 10 0 Explorers User Guide
368 pages
Installing Tivoli Storage Manager 6
No ratings yet
Installing Tivoli Storage Manager 6
19 pages
Opentext™ Extended Ecm For Sap Solutions: Installation and Upgrade Guide
No ratings yet
Opentext™ Extended Ecm For Sap Solutions: Installation and Upgrade Guide
184 pages
RedHat Train4sure EX200 v2019-02-10 by Travis 53q (1) Odg
No ratings yet
RedHat Train4sure EX200 v2019-02-10 by Travis 53q (1) Odg
31 pages
Understanding Processor Utilization With Ibm Powervm
No ratings yet
Understanding Processor Utilization With Ibm Powervm
15 pages
Microservices: A de Nition of This New Architectural Term
No ratings yet
Microservices: A de Nition of This New Architectural Term
16 pages
Configuring+Tomcat-Connector+for+IIS+8 0+ (Windows+Server+2012+or+Windows+8)
No ratings yet
Configuring+Tomcat-Connector+for+IIS+8 0+ (Windows+Server+2012+or+Windows+8)
8 pages
NetWorker Cloning Integration Guide
No ratings yet
NetWorker Cloning Integration Guide
100 pages
JDBC
No ratings yet
JDBC
210 pages
T-76.5613 - 04-Continuous Integration Delivery and Deployment - 2015
No ratings yet
T-76.5613 - 04-Continuous Integration Delivery and Deployment - 2015
42 pages
TeamForge 620 User Guide
No ratings yet
TeamForge 620 User Guide
336 pages
Hitachi Unified Storage - Operations Gui PDF
No ratings yet
Hitachi Unified Storage - Operations Gui PDF
580 pages
EMC® Unisphere™ For VMAX® PDF
No ratings yet
EMC® Unisphere™ For VMAX® PDF
56 pages
23 Linux CD Command Examples - The Linux Juggernaut
No ratings yet
23 Linux CD Command Examples - The Linux Juggernaut
7 pages
RedHat Ansible Automation Platform 2.4 - Getting Started With Automation Controller
No ratings yet
RedHat Ansible Automation Platform 2.4 - Getting Started With Automation Controller
27 pages
Ignite Sample
0% (1)
Ignite Sample
88 pages
Veritas NetBackup 6.5 For Oracle Administrator's Guide
0% (1)
Veritas NetBackup 6.5 For Oracle Administrator's Guide
230 pages
IBM Integration Bus Third Edition
From Everand
IBM Integration Bus Third Edition
Gerardus Blokdyk
No ratings yet
IBM WebSphere MQ A Complete Guide
From Everand
IBM WebSphere MQ A Complete Guide
Gerardus Blokdyk
No ratings yet
ColdFusion Interview Questions, Answers, and Explanations: ColdFusion Certification Review
From Everand
ColdFusion Interview Questions, Answers, and Explanations: ColdFusion Certification Review
equitypress
No ratings yet
IBM InfoSphere Replication Server and Data Event Publisher
From Everand
IBM InfoSphere Replication Server and Data Event Publisher
Pav Kumar-Chatterjee
No ratings yet
ham_pkt_soundmodem_user_guide
No ratings yet
ham_pkt_soundmodem_user_guide
8 pages
Learning Activity - 3 Clauses
No ratings yet
Learning Activity - 3 Clauses
11 pages
LARAVEL Notes
No ratings yet
LARAVEL Notes
22 pages
XC Series in Eng
No ratings yet
XC Series in Eng
5 pages
Strengthening Early Literacy Skills Through Data-Driven Decision
No ratings yet
Strengthening Early Literacy Skills Through Data-Driven Decision
106 pages
Literature Review - Tip Sheet
No ratings yet
Literature Review - Tip Sheet
2 pages
Windows 95 DiskOnChip
No ratings yet
Windows 95 DiskOnChip
4 pages
Trinco Number of Answer Scripts - English - To Kandy
No ratings yet
Trinco Number of Answer Scripts - English - To Kandy
2 pages
The Sunday Bulletin
No ratings yet
The Sunday Bulletin
2 pages
2023 06 095 - Log
No ratings yet
2023 06 095 - Log
3 pages
Chapter 8
No ratings yet
Chapter 8
35 pages
Types of Essay
No ratings yet
Types of Essay
3 pages
C AP T: Official Organ of KTP, Dawrpui Vengthar West
No ratings yet
C AP T: Official Organ of KTP, Dawrpui Vengthar West
6 pages
Arthurs Myth
No ratings yet
Arthurs Myth
3 pages
Utilitarianism Lesson
No ratings yet
Utilitarianism Lesson
3 pages
LDRPS Installation Guide: Last Updated: Monday, April 30, 2007 2:29 PM
No ratings yet
LDRPS Installation Guide: Last Updated: Monday, April 30, 2007 2:29 PM
50 pages
Term Paper Computer Science
100% (1)
Term Paper Computer Science
5 pages
2 Year Acting Film: Conservatory Program
No ratings yet
2 Year Acting Film: Conservatory Program
6 pages
M.K.V.V.International Vidyalaya Practice Sheet 2020-2021 STD - I Sub. - English
No ratings yet
M.K.V.V.International Vidyalaya Practice Sheet 2020-2021 STD - I Sub. - English
4 pages
ICSE Class 10 English Literature Question Paper Solution 2016
No ratings yet
ICSE Class 10 English Literature Question Paper Solution 2016
18 pages
Difficulties in English
100% (2)
Difficulties in English
39 pages
Aitbar Sajid Romantic Urdu Poet & Writer
No ratings yet
Aitbar Sajid Romantic Urdu Poet & Writer
1 page
English For Aquaculture 1
No ratings yet
English For Aquaculture 1
55 pages
Lit Analysis
No ratings yet
Lit Analysis
7 pages